TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION
PAGE
1
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
9
9
10
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INTRODUCTION
1
CONTENTS
Ⅵ Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Ⅵ How To Use This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Ⅵ Warnings And Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Ⅵ Vehicle Identification Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Ⅵ Vehicle Modifications / Alterations . . . . . . . . . . 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4
INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION
WARNING!
This manual has been prepared with the assistance of
service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with
the operation and maintenance of your new vehicle. It is
supplemented by a Warranty Information Booklet and
various customer oriented documents. You are urged to
read these publications carefully. Following the instruc-
tions and recommendations in this manual will help
assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain
vehicle components contain or emit chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive harm. In addition,
certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain prod-
ucts of component wear contain or emit chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive harm.
NOTE: After you read the manual, it should be stored
in the vehicle for convenient reference and remain with
the vehicle when sold, so that the new owner will be
aware of all safety warnings.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Consult the table of contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
When it comes to service, remember that your dealer
knows your vehicle best, has the factory-trained techni-
cians and genuine Mopar parts, and is interested in
your satisfaction.
The detailed index, at the rear of this manual, contains a
complete listing of all subjects.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INTRODUCTION
5
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This manual contains WARNINGS against operating
procedures which could result in an accident or bodily
injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures
which could result in damage to your vehicle. If you do
not read this entire manual you may miss important
information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.
1
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The vehicle identification number (VIN) is found on a
stamped plate located on the left front corner of the
instrument panel pad, visible from outside of the vehicle
through the windshield. This number also appears on the
Automobile Information Disclosure Label affixed to a
window on your vehicle. Save this label for a convenient
record of your vehicle identification number and optional
equipment.
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS / ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle
could seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety
and may lead to an accident resulting in serious
injury or death.
NOTE: It is illegal to remove the VIN plate.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2
CONTENTS
Ⅵ A Word About Your Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
▫ Key-In-Ignition Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
▫ Sentry Key — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Ⅵ Ignition And Steering Lock — If Equipped . . . .11
▫ Manual Transmissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
▫ Automatic Transmissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Ⅵ Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
▫ Vehicles Equipped With Power Door Locks . . . .12
Ⅵ Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
▫ Manual Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
▫ Power Door Locks — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . .14
▫ Child Protection Door Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Ⅵ Remote Keyless Entry — If Equipped . . . . . . . .17
▫ To Unlock The Doors (Four Door Vehicles) . . . .17
▫ To Lock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
▫ Using The Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
▫ Programming Additional Transmitters . . . . . . . .19
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
▫ Transmitter Battery Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Ⅵ Security Alarm System — If Equipped . . . . . . .21
▫ To Set The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
▫ To Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Ⅵ Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
▫ Power Windows — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .22
▫ Sliding Rear Window—If Equipped . . . . . . . . .23
▫ Club Cab Vented Quarter Window . . . . . . . . . .24
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Ⅵ Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
▫ Lap/ Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
▫ Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage . . . .29
▫ Seat Belt Pretensioners—Quad Cab Only . . . . . .29
▫ Front Lap Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
▫ Seat Belts And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . .30
▫ Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
▫ Driver And Right Front Passenger Supplemental
Restraint System—Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
▫ Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
Ⅵ Engine Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . .52
Ⅵ Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53
▫ Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
9
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS
SENTRY KEY — IF EQUIPPED
The double sided keys may be inserted into the locks
with either side up. The keys for your new vehicle are
enclosed in a plastic bag with a bar code label affixed to
the front. The bar code can be used to order duplicate
keys from your dealer or a locksmith. If you received
your keys without the bag, ask your dealer to give you
the number.
With this system, an electronically coded ignition key
sends a signal to the vehicle electronics. If the electronics
recognizes the signal, the vehicle will start and continue
to run. If the system does not recognize the signal, the
vehicle will start and run for 2 seconds, then shut off.
After six unsuccessful attempts at starting, the system
will shut down until the correct key is used.
2
Key-In-Ignition Reminder
NOTE: The Sentry Key Immobilizer System is not
compatible with remote starting systems. Use of these
systems may result in vehicle starting problems and a
loss of security protection. Additional Sentry Keys or
Mobil Speed-pass™ devices held against or immediately
adjacent to the ignition key when starting the engine may
cause vehicle starting problems. If a problem occurs,
remove the Sentry Key from the key-ring and attempt to
start the vehicle again. Pagers, cell phones, walkman, etc.
will have no effect on this system.
If you open the driver’s door when the key is in the
ignition lock, a continuous chime will sound to remind
you to remove the key.
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation to thieves.
Always remove the key from the ignition and lock
all the doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
The ЉSecurity LightЉ will illuminate for about 3 seconds
when the ignition switch is first turned to the ON
position. If the vehicle electronics do not receive a valid
signal from the ignition key, the ЉSecurity LightЉ will flash
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
continuously to signal that the vehicle has been immobi-
lized. If the ЉSecurity LightЉ remains on during vehicle
operation, it indicates a fault in the system electronics. If
this option was ordered, all of the keys provided with
your new vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle
electronics.
Customer Key Programming
You can program new keys to the system if you have two
valid keys by doing the following:
1. Insert the first valid key into the ignition and turn the
ignition to the ON position for at least 3 seconds but no
longer than 15 seconds. Turn the ignition back to the OFF
position and remove the first key.
Replacement Keys
NOTE: Only keys that have been programmed to the
vehicle electronics can be used to start the vehicle. Once
a Sentry Key has been programmed to a vehicle, it cannot
be programmed to any other vehicle.
2. Insert the second valid key and switch the ignition to
the ON position within 15 seconds. After 10 seconds, a
chime will sound and the ЉSecurity LightЉ will begin to
flash. Turn the ignition back to the OFF position and
remove the second key.
At the time of purchase, the original owner is provided
with a four digit PIN number. This number is required
for dealer replacement of keys. Duplication of keys may
be performed at an authorized dealer or by using the
Customer Key Programming procedure. This procedure
consists of programming a blank key to the vehicle
electronics. A blank key is one which has never been
programmed and needs to be cut.
3. Insert a blank Sentry Key into the ignition and switch
the ignition to the ON position within 60 seconds of
having removed the second key. After 10 seconds, a
single chime will sound. The ЉSecurity LightЉ will stop
flashing, then turn on for 3 seconds; then turn off.
The new Sentry Key has been programmed. Repeat this
process to program up to a total of 8 keys.
NOTE: When having the Sentry Key System serviced,
bring all vehicle keys to the dealer.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11
General Information
IGNITION AND STEERING LOCK — IF EQUIPPED
This device complies with part 15 of FCC rules and with
RS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
Manual Transmissions
Depress and hold the release button located between the
ignition switch and the instrument panel. Turn the igni-
tion key to LOCK and remove the key.
2
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly ap-
proved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Manual Transmissions
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Automatic Transmissions
NOTE: On vehicles equipped with an automatic trans-
mission, the key cannot be turned to LOCK until the
selector is in the PARK position. Do not attempt to pull
the shift lever out of PARK after the key is in the LOCK
position.
In the LOCK position, the steering and ignition systems
are locked to provide antitheft protection for your ve-
hicle. It may be difficult to turn the key from the LOCK
position when starting your vehicle. Move the steering
wheel left and right while turning the key until it turns
easily. The key can be inserted or withdrawn only in the
LOCK position. Push in on the key in the ignition lock
cylinder to rotate to the LOCK position.
ILLUMINATED ENTRY
Vehicles Equipped With Power Door Locks
All interior lights will illuminate in the vehicle when the
doors are unlocked using the key fob, when any door is
opened or, if equipped with security, when the door key
cylinder is turned to the unlock position. Vehicles
equipped with a cargo lamp will turn the cargo lamp on
for 30 seconds when the doors are unlocked using the key
fob.
The interior lights will remain on for 30 seconds after the
last door is closed, or until all doors are closed and either
the ignition is turned to the ON position or a key fob
LOCK button is pressed.
Automatic Transmissions
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13
There is also a battery saver feature that will turn the
interior lights off after 15 minutes if the ignition is OFF
and a door is left open or the dimmer control is in the
interior lights ON position or cargo light ON position.
WARNING!
For personal security and safety in the event of an
accident, lock the vehicle doors when you drive as
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
2
DOOR LOCKS
Manual Locks
Front doors may be locked, sliding the lock knob rear-
ward. When the orange indicator is visible the lock knob
is in the unlocked position.
WARNING!
When leaving the vehicle always remove the key
from the ignition lock, and lock your vehicle. Do not
leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of
vehicle equipment may cause severe personal inju-
ries and death.
Both doors may be opened with the inside door handle
without sliding the lock knob forward. Doors locked
before closing will remain locked when closed.
The ignition key will unlock all the locks on your vehicle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Power Door Locks — If Equipped
Vehicles equipped with power door locks can be locked
or unlocked from inside by either the use of the door lock
switches located on the front doors or by pressing the
LOCK or UNLOCK buttons on the Remote Keyless Entry
key fob.
As a safety feature the doors will not lock when using the
door lock switches during the following conditions:
1. The driver’s door is open while the key is in the
ignition.
2. The driver’s door is open while the headlight switch is
ON.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15
Central Locking — If Equipped
2. Fasten your seat belt (Fastening the seat belt will
cancel any chiming that may confuse you during this
programming procedure).
Vehicles with security will have a feature called ЉCentral
Locking.Љ When the key is placed in the door cylinder
and turned to the ЉUnlockЉ position, the security will be
disarmed, the illuminated entry will be turned on and
that door will be mechanically unlocked. If the key is
once again turned to the unlock position within 5 seconds
of the first unlock, the remaining doors will unlock. If the
key is turned to the ЉLockЉ position while all doors are
closed, illuminated entry will be canceled, security will
begin arming, and all doors will lock.
2
3. Place the key into the ignition.
4. Within 10 seconds cycle the key from the OFF position
to the ON position four times; ending in the OFF position
( Do not start the engine ).
5. Within 30 seconds, press the driver’s door lock switch
in the LOCK direction.
6. A single chime will be heard to indicate the feature has
been disabled.
Automatic Door Locks
If this feature is enabled, your door locks will lock
automatically when the vehicle’s speed exceeds 15 mph
(24 km/ h).
7. To reactivate this feature, repeat the above steps.
8. If a chime is not heard, program mode was canceled
before the feature could be disabled. If necessary, repeat
the above procedure.
This feature is enabled when your vehicle is shipped
from the assembly plant and can be disabled by using the
following procedure:
1. Enter your vehicle and close all doors.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Child Protection Door Lock
This label is located near the
lock lever.
To provide a safer environment for small children riding
in the rear seats, the rear doors are equipped with a child
protection door lock system.
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in the vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the rear doors can only be opened
from the outside when the child protection locks are
engaged.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY — IF EQUIPPED
illuminated entry will initiate, the parking lights will
flash on twice and if installed, the cargo lamp will turn on
for 30 seconds.
2
The system can be programmed to unlock all the doors
upon the first UNLOCK button press by using the
following procedure:
1. Enter your vehicle and close all doors.
2. Fasten your seat belt. (Fastening the seat belt will
cancel any chiming that may confuse you during this
programming procedure).
3. Place the key into the ignition.
This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors from
distances up to about 23 feet (7 meters) using a hand held
radio transmitter. The transmitter need not be pointed at
the vehicle to activate the system.
4. Within 10 seconds cycle the key from the OFF position
to the ON position four times; ending in the ON position
( Do not start the engine ).
5. Within 30 seconds, press the driver’s door lock switch
in the UNLOCK direction.
To unlock the doors (four door vehicles):
Press and release the UNLOCK button on the key fob
once to unlock only the driver’s door or twice to unlock
all the doors. When the UNLOCK button is pressed, the
6. A single chime will be heard to indicate the feature has
been disabled.
7. To reactivate this feature, repeat the above steps.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
8. If a chime is not heard, program mode was canceled
before the feature could be disabled. If necessary, repeat
the above procedure.
2. Fasten your seat belt (Fastening the seat belt will
cancel any chiming that may confuse you during this
programming procedure).
NOTE: All two-door vehicles will be shipped from the
assembly plant with this feature disabled. If this feature is
enabled on a two door vehicle, a single UNLOCK button
press will initiate the illuminated entry only - none of the
doors will unlock. If the UNLOCK button is pressed a
second time within 4 seconds of the first, all doors will
unlock.
3. Place the key into the ignition.
4. Turn the ignition to the ON position ( Do not start the
engine ).
5. Press and hold the LOCK button on the key fob.
6. After holding the LOCK button for four seconds, also
press the PANIC button within 6 seconds.
To lock the doors:
7. When a single chime is heard, release both buttons.
8. Turn the ignition OFF to test the horn chirp feature.
9. To reactivate this feature, repeat the above steps.
Press and release the LOCK button on the transmitter to
lock all doors. If the ignition is OFF, when the doors are
locked, the parking lights will flash on once and the horn
will chirp once.
10. If a chime is not heard, program mode was canceled
before the feature could be disabled. If necessary, repeat
the above procedure.
The horn chirp feature will be shipped from the assembly
plants activated. If desired this feature can be disabled by
using the following procedure:
1. Enter your vehicle and close all doors.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19
Using the Panic Alarm
NOTE: When entering program mode using that fob,
all other programmed fobs will be erased and you will
have to reprogram them for your vehicle.
To activate the Panic mode while the ignition is OFF press
and release the PANIC button on the transmitter once.
When the Panic mode is activated, the interior lights will
illuminate, the headlamps and parking lights will flash,
and the horn will sound.
2
Use the Following procedure to program additional key
fobs:
1. Enter your vehicle and close all doors.
To cancel the Panic mode press and release the PANIC
button on the transmitter a second time. Panic mode will
automatically cancel after 3 minutes or if the vehicle is
started and exceeds 15 mph (24 km/ h). During the Panic
Mode, the door locks and remote keyless entry systems
will function normally. Panic mode will not disarm the
security system on vehicles so equipped.
2. Fasten your seat belt (Fastening the seatbelt will cancel
any chiming that may confuse you during this program-
ming procedure).
3. Place the key into the ignition.
4. Turn the ignition to the ON position ( Do not start the
engine ).
Programming Additional Transmitters
5. Press and hold the UNLOCK button on the key fob.
Vehicles with the keyless entry option will be shipped
from the assembly plants with two key fob transmitters
programmed only for that vehicle. A total of four fobs can
be programmed for your vehicle. Additional fobs can be
programmed to your vehicle through the use of a cur-
rently programmed fob.
6. After holding the UNLOCK button for four seconds,
also press the PANIC button within 6 seconds.
7. Release both buttons and a single chime will be heard.
The chime is an indication that you have successfully
entered program mode. All fobs that are to be pro-
grammed must be done so within 30 seconds of when the
chime was heard.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
8. Using the fob to be programmed, press and release
both the LOCK and UNLOCK buttons, simultaneously.
General Information
This device complies with part 15 of FCC rules and with
RS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
9. A single chime will be heard.
10. Within four seconds of hearing the chime, press and
release either the LOCK or UNLOCK button on the fob.
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
11. Repeat steps 8 through 10 to program up to two
additional fobs.
12. Your vehicle will remain in program mode up to 30
seconds from when the original chime was heard. After
30 seconds, all programmed fobs function normally.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly ap-
proved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
NOTE: If you do not have a programmed transmitter,
contact your dealer for details.
If your Keyless Entry Transmitter fails to operate from a
normal distance, check for these two conditions.
1. Weak batteries in transmitter. The expected life of the
batteries is from one to two years.
2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station
tower, airport transmitter, and some mobile or CB radios.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21
Transmitter Battery Service
2. Remove and replace the batteries. Avoid touching the
new batteries with your fingers. Skin oils may cause
battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it with
rubbing alcohol.
2
3. To reassemble the transmitter case snap the two halves
together. Make sure there is an even gap between the two
halves. Test transmitter operation.
SECURITY ALARM SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
This system monitors the vehicle doors and ignition for
unauthorized operation. When the alarm is activated, the
system provides both audible and visual signals. The
horn will sound repeatedly for 3 minutes and the head-
lights and security light in the instrument cluster will
flash for an additional 15 minutes. The engine will not
run until the system is disarmed.
The recommended replacement battery is 2016.
NOTE: Do not touch the battery terminals that are on
the back housing or the printed circuit board.
To Set the Alarm:
1. With transmitter buttons facing down, use a flat blade
or dime to pry the two halves of the transmitter apart.
Make sure not to damage the rubber gasket during
removal.
The alarm will set when you use the power door locks,
turn the key in the door lock cylinder, or use the Keyless
Entry transmitter to lock the doors. After all the doors are
locked and closed the SECURITY light in the instrument
cluster will flash rapidly to signal that the system is
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
arming. The security light in the instrument panel cluster
will flash rapidly for about 15 seconds to indicate that the
alarm is being set. After the alarm is set, the security light
will flash at a slower rate to indicate that the system is
armed.
The Security Alarm System is designed to protect your
vehicle; however, you can create conditions where the
system will arm unexpectedly. If you remain in the
vehicle and lock the doors with the transmitter, the alarm
will sound when you pull the door handle to exit. You
may also accidentally disarm the system by unlocking
any door with the door key and then locking it. The door
will be locked but the Security Alarm will not arm.
NOTE: If the SECURITY light stays on continuously
during vehicle operation, have the system checked by
your dealer.
WINDOWS
To Disarm the System:
Use the Keyless Entry transmitter or the key to turn the
door locks to the unlock position. If something has
triggered the system in your absence, the horn will sound
three times when you unlock the doors. Check the
vehicle for tampering.
Power Windows — IF Equipped
The Security system will also disarm, if the vehicle is
started with a programmed Sentry Key. If an unpro-
grammed Sentry Key is used to start a vehicle, the engine
will run for 2 seconds and then the security alarm will be
initiated. To exit alarming mode, press the RKE Unlock
button, unlock the doors using the key cylinder, or start
the vehicle with a programmed Sentry Key.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23
Window Lockout Switch
The window lockout switch on the driver’s door allows
you to disable the window control on the other doors. To
disable the window controls on the other doors, press the
window lock button. To enable the window controls,
press the window control button again.
2
The control on the left front door panel has up-down
switches that give you fingertip control of all power
windows. There is a single opening and closing switch on
the front passenger door for passenger window control
and on the rear doors of Quad Cab models. The windows
will operate only when the ignition switch is turned to
the ON position.
Sliding Rear Window—If Equipped
A locking device in the center of the window helps to
prevent entry from the rear of the vehicle. Squeeze the
lock to release the window.
Auto Down
The driver’s window switch has an Auto Down feature.
Press the window switch past the detent, release, and the
window will go down automatically.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Club Cab Vented Quarter Window
OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS
The Club Cab is equipped with rear quarter windows
that open out. Pull the window latch toward you to
unlock, and push out on the window. Press the latch
straight to secure the window in an open position.
Some of the most important safety features in your
vehicle are the restraint systems. These include the front
and rear seat belts for the driver and all passengers, and
front airbags for both the driver and front passenger. If
you will be carrying children too small for adult-size
belts, your seat belts also can be used to hold infant and
child restraint systems.
WIND BUFFETING
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if so equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur-
rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows
together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to
minimize the buffeting.
Please pay close attention to the information in this
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
properly to keep you and your passengers as safe as
possible.
WARNING!
In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buck-
led up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or
other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the
vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your
vehicle are buckled up properly.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver
and cause a collision that includes you. This can happen
far away from home or on your own street.
WARNING!
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
2
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and that
they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision.
Some of the worst injuries happen when people are
thrown from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility
of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the
inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should
be belted at all times.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
The outboard front and rear seats of your vehicle have
combination lap/ shoulder belts. The belt webbing retrac-
tor is designed to lock during very sudden stops or
collisions. This feature allows the shoulder part of the
belt to move freely with you under normal conditions.
But in a collision, the belt will lock and reduce the risk of
your striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown
out.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
WARNING!
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the seat.
•
Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous. Seat
belts are designed to go around the large bones of
your body. These are the strongest parts of your
body and can take the forces of a collision the
best. Wearing your belt in the wrong place could
make your injuries in a collision much worse. You
might suffer internal injuries, or you could even
slide out of part of the belt. Follow these instruc-
tions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep
your passengers safe, too.
•
Two people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into one
another in an accident, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for
more than one person, no matter what their size.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front
seat, next to your arm in the rear seat. Grasp the latch
plate and pull out the belt. Slide the latch plate up the
webbing as far as necessary to allow the belt to go around
your lap.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27
WARNING!
•
A belt buckled into the wrong buckle will not
protect you properly. The lap portion could ride too
high on your body, possibly causing internal injuries.
Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you.
2
• A belt that is too loose will not protect you as well.
In a sudden stop you could move too far forward,
increasing the possibility of injury. Wear your seat
belt snugly.
•
A belt that is worn under your arm is very danger-
ous. Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the
vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck
injury. And a belt worn under the arm can cause
internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the belt over your shoulder so that your
strongest bones will take the force in a collision.
3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
• A shoulder belt placed behind will not protect you
from injury during a collision. You are more likely to
hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your
shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt are meant to
be used together.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up
on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight,
tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug belt
reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a collision.
WARNING!
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
internal injury in a collision. The belt forces won’t
be at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your
abdomen. Always wear the lap belt as low as pos-
sible and keep it snug.
• A twisted belt can’t do its job as well. In a collision
it could even cut into you. Be sure the belt is straight.
If you can’t straighten a belt in your vehicle, take it
to your dealer and have it fixed.
5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor
will withdraw any slack in the belt.
6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle.
The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position.
If necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to
allow the belt to retract fully.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision
and leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt
system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose
parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately.
Do not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they
have been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing,
etc.).
2
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will
prefer a lower position, and if you are taller than average,
you’ll prefer a higher position. When you release the
anchorage, try to move it up or down to make sure that
it is locked in position.
In the front row outboard seats, the shoulder belt can be
adjusted upward or downward to help position the belt
away from your neck. Lift the button located above the
upper belt guide to release the anchorage, and then move
it up or down to the position that serves you best.
Seat Belt Pretensioners—Quad Cab Only
The seat belts for both front seating positions are
equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to
remove any slack from the seat belt systems in the event
of a collision. These devices improve the performance of
the seat belt by assuring that the belt is tight about the
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
occupant early in a collision. Pretensioners work for all
size occupants, including those in child restraints.
WARNING!
•
•
A lap belt worn too loose or too high is dangerous.
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper
seat belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still
must be worn snugly and positioned properly.
A belt worn too loose can allow you to slip down
and under the belt in a collision.
•
A belt that is too loose or too high will apply crash
forces to the abdomen, not to the stronger hip
bones. In either case, the risk of internal injuries
is greater. Wear a lap belt low and snug.
The pretensioners are triggered by the airbag control
module. Like the airbags, the pretensioners are single use
items. After a collision that is severe enough to deploy
the airbags and pretensioners, both must be replaced.
Front Lap Belts
Seat Belts and Pregnant Women
The center seating positions have a lap belt only. To fasten
the lap belt, slide the latch plate into the buckle until you
hear a Љclick.Љ To lengthen the lap belt, tilt the latch plate
and pull. To remove slack, pull the loose end of the
webbing. Wear the lap belt snug against the hips. Sit back
and erect in the seat, then adjust the belt as tightly as is
comfortable.
We recommend that pregnant women use seat belts
throughout their pregnancies. Keeping the mother safe is
the best way to keep the baby safe.
Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt
across the thighs and as snug against the hips as possible.
Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the
abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take
the force if there is a collision.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31
Seat Belt Extender
is mounted in the instrument panel, above the glove
compartment. The words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on
the airbag covers.
If a seat belt is too short, even when fully extended, your
dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender. This
extender should be used only if the existing belt is not
long enough. When it is not required, remove the ex-
tender and store it.
2
These airbags are certified to the new Federal regulations
that allow less forceful deployments.
WARNING!
Using a seat belt extender when not needed can
increase the risk of injury in a collision. Only use the
seat belt extender when the lap belt is not long
enough when it is worn low and snug, and in the
recommended seating positions. Remove and store
the extender when not needed.
Driver And Right Front Passenger Supplemental
Restraint System—Airbag
This vehicle has front airbags for both the driver and
front passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint
systems. The driver’s front airbag is mounted in the
center of the steering wheel. The passenger’s front airbag
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
•
•
Children 12 years and under should ride buckled up in
a rear seat, if available.
WARNING!
Do not put anything on or around the front airbag
covers or attempt to manually open them. You may
damage the airbags and you could be injured be-
cause the airbags are not there to protect you. These
protective covers for the airbag cushions are de-
signed to open only when the airbags are inflating.
Infants in rear facing child restraints must NEVER
ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger front
airbag unless the airbag is turned off. An airbag
deployment could cause severe injury or death to
infants in that position. See the passenger airbag
on/ off switch section.
•
•
If your vehicle does not have a rear seat, see the
Passenger Airbag On/ Off Switch section.
Airbags inflate in moderate to high speed impacts. Along
with the seatbelts, front airbags work with the instrument
panel knee bolsters to provide improved protection for
the driver and front passenger.
Children that are not big enough to properly wear the
vehicle seat belt (see section on Child Restraints)
should be secured in the rear seat in child restraints or
belt-positioning booster seats. Older children who do
not use child restraints or belt-positioning booster
seats should ride properly buckled up in the rear seat.
Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind
them or under their arm.
The seat belts are designed to protect you in many types
of collisions. The front airbags deploy in moderate to
severe frontal collisions. But even in collisions where the
airbags work, you need the seat belts to keep you in the
right position for the airbags to protect you properly.
Here are some simple steps you can follow to minimize
the risk of harm from a deploying airbag.
•
All occupants should use their seat belts properly.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33
•
The driver and front passenger seats should be moved
back as far as practical to allow the airbag room to
inflate.
•
•
•
•
•
•
AIRBAG Readiness Light
Driver Airbag
Passenger Airbag
2
WARNING!
Steering Wheel and Column
Instrument Panel
•
Relying on the airbags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The airbags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions the airbags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belts even though you
have airbags.
Airbag Control Module bullet (with integrated crash
sensor)
•
•
•
Interconnecting Wiring
Knee Impact Bolsters
•
Being too close to the steering wheel or instru-
ment panel during airbag deployment could cause
serious injury. Airbags need room to inflate. Sit
back, comfortably extending your arms to reach
the steering wheel or instrument panel.
Passenger Side Frontal Airbag ON/ OFF Switch
How The Airbag System Works
•
•
The airbag control module determines if a frontal
collision is severe enough to require the airbags to
inflate.
Airbag System Components
The airbag control module will not detect side, roll
over, or rear collisions.
The airbag system consists of the following:
•
Airbag Control Module
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
•
The airbag control module also monitors the readiness
of the electronic parts of the system whenever the
ignition switch is in the START or RUN positions.
These include all of the items listed above except the
knee bolsters, the instrument panel, and the steering
wheel and column If the key is in the ЉoffЉ position, in
the ACC position, or not in the ignition, the airbags are
not on and will not inflate
•
When the airbag control module detects a collision
requiring the airbags, it signals the inflator units. A
large quantity of nontoxic gas is generated to inflate
the airbags. The airbag covers separate and fold out of
the way as the airbags inflate to their full size. The
airbags fully inflate in milliseconds. This is only about
half of the time it takes you to blink your eyes. The
airbags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain
the driver and front passenger. The driver’s front
airbag gas is vented through the airbag material
towards the instrument panel. The passenger’s front
airbag gas is vented through vent holes in the sides of
the airbag. In this way the airbags do not interfere with
your control of the vehicle.
•
The airbag control module also turns on the AIRBAG
light in the instrument panel for 6 to 8 seconds when
the ignition is first turned on, then turns the light off.
If it detects a malfunction in any part of the system, it
turns on the light either momentarily or continuously.
•
The knee impact bolsters help protect the knees and
position you for the best interaction with the front
airbag.
WARNING!
Ignoring the AIRBAG light in your instrument panel
could mean you won’t have the airbags to protect
you in a collision. If the light does not come on, stays
on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes on as you
drive, have the airbag system checked right away.
Passenger Airbag On/Off Switch – If Equipped
The passenger front airbag is to be turned off only if the
passenger:
•
is an infant (less than 1 year old) who must ride in the
front seat because there is no rear seat, because the rear
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35
seat is too small for a rear-facing infant restraint or
because the infant has a medical condition which
makes it necessary for the driver to be able to see the
infant,
2
•
•
is a child, age 1 to 12 who must ride in the front seat
because there is no rear seat, because there is no rear
seat position available, or because the child has a
medical condition which makes it necessary for the
driver to be able to see the child,
has a medical condition which makes passenger airbag
inflation (deployment) a greater risk for the passenger
than the risk of hitting the dashboard (instrument
panel) or windshield in a crash.
NOTE: The Passenger Airbag On/ Off Switch is not
available in the Quad Cab.
WARNING!
To Shut Off the Passenger Airbag
Whenever an airbag is turned off, even a lap/
shoulder belted passenger may hit their head, neck,
or chest on the dashboard (instrument panel) or
windshield in a crash. This may result in serious
injury or death.
Place the ignition key in the Passenger Airbag On/ Off
Switch, push the key in and turn clockwise, and remove
the key from the switch. This will shut off the passenger
side airbag. The “Off” light near the switch will illumi-
nate when the ignition switch is turned to the ON
position.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To Turn On the Passenger Airbag
floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals.
They are not permanent and normally heal quickly.
However, if you haven’t healed significantly within a
few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor
immediately.
Place the ignition key in the Passenger Airbag On/ Off
Switch, push the key in and turn counterclockwise, and
remove the key from the switch. This will turn on the
passenger airbag. The “Off” light near the switch will be
off when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position.
•
•
As the airbags deflate you may see some smoke-like
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
process that generates the nontoxic gas used for airbag
inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the skin,
eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye irritation,
rinse the area with cool water. For nose or throat
irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation continues,
see your doctor. If these particles settle on your
clothing, follow the garment manufacturers instruc-
tions for cleaning.
If A Deployment Occurs
The airbag system is designed to deploy when the air bag
control module detects a moderate-to-severe frontal col-
lision, and then immediately to deflate.
NOTE: A frontal collision that is not severe enough to
need airbag protection will not activate the system. This
does not mean something is wrong with the airbag
system.
If you do have a collision which deploys the airbags, any
or all of the following may occur:
It is not advisable to drive your vehicle after the
airbags have deployed. If you are involved in another
collision, the airbags will not be in place to protect you.
•
The nylon airbag material may sometimes cause abra-
sions and/ or skin reddening to the driver and front
passenger as the airbags deploy and unfold. The
abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those
you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37
Maintaining Your Airbag Systems
WARNING!
Deployed airbags can’t protect you in another colli-
sion. Have the airbags replaced by an authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
WARNING!
2
•
Modifications to any part of the airbag system
could cause it to fail when you need it. You could
be injured because the airbags are not there to
protect you. Do not modify the components or
wiring, including adding any kind of badges or
stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or
the upper right side of the instrument panel. Do
not modify the front bumper, vehicle body struc-
ture, or frame.
Enhanced Accident Response System
If the airbags deploy after an impact and the electrical
system remains functional, vehicles equipped with
power door locks will unlock automatically. In addition,
approximately 10 seconds after the vehicle has stopped
moving, the interior lights will light until the ignition
switch is turned off.
•
•
You need proper knee impact protection in a
collision. Do not mount or locate any aftermarket
equipment on or behind the knee bolster.
It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the
airbag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
works on your vehicle that it has airbags.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Airbag Light
Child Restraint
You will want to have the airbags ready to inflate for your
protection in an impact. While the airbag system is
designed to be maintenance free, if any of the following
occurs, have an authorized dealer service the system
promptly:
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up all the
time — babies and children, too. Every state in the United
States and all Canadian provinces require that small
children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the law,
and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
•
The airbag light does not come on or flickers during
the 6 to 8 seconds when the ignition switch is first
turned on.
Children 12 years and under should ride properly buck-
led up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash
statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in
the rear seats rather than in the front.
•
•
The light remains on or flickers after the 6 to 8 second
interval.
WARNING!
The light flickers or comes on and remains on while
driving.
In a collision, an unrestrained child, even a tiny
baby, can become a missile inside the vehicle. The
force required to hold even an infant on your lap can
become so great that you could not hold the child, no
matter how strong you are. The child and others
could be badly injured. Any child riding in your
vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child’s
size.
NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer or any engine
related gauges are not working, the airbag control mod-
ule may also be disabled. The airbags may not be ready
to inflate for your protection. Promptly check fuse num-
bers 18 and 19 in the fuse block. See your dealer if the
fuse is good.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39
Infants and Small Children
•
•
Rearward-facing child seats must NEVER be used in
the front seat of a vehicle with a front passenger airbag
unless the airbag is turned off. An airbag deployment
could cause severe injury or death to infants in this
position.
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
children from newborn size to the child almost large
enough for the adult seat belt. Use the restraint that is
correct for your child:
2
•
Safety experts recommend that children ride
rearward-facing in the vehicle until they are at least
one year old and weigh at least 20 lbs (9 kg). Two types
of child restraints can be used rearward-facing: infant
carriers and ЉconvertibleЉ child seats. Both types of
child restraints are held in the vehicle by the lap/
shoulder belt.
Children who weigh more than 20 lbs. (9 kg) and who
are older than one year can ride forward-facing in the
vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible
child seats used in the forward-facing direction are for
children who weigh 20 to 40 lbs (9 to 18 kg) and who
are older than one year. These child seats are also held
in the vehicle by the lap/ shoulder belt.
•
The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in the
vehicle. It is recommended for children who weigh up
to about 20 lbs (9 kg). ЉConvertibleЉ child seats can be
used either rearward-facing or forward-facing in the
vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a higher
weight limit in the rearward-facing direction than
infant carriers do, so they can be used rearward-facing
by children who weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg) but are
less than one year old.
•
The belt-positioning booster seat is for children weigh-
ing more than 40 lbs (18 kg), but who are still too small
to fit the vehicle’s seat belts properly. If the child
cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle’s seat
cushion while the child’s back is against the seat back,
they should use a belt-positioning-booster seat. The
child and booster seat are held in the vehicle by the
lap/ shoulder belt. (Some booster seats are equipped
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
with a front shield and are held in the vehicle by the
lap portion.) For further information refer to
www.seatcheck.org.
Here are some tips for getting the most out of your child
restraint:
•
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it
has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
Standards. We also recommend that you make sure
that you can install the child restraint in the vehicle
where you will use it before you buy it.
WARNING!
•
•
Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the manufacturers directions ex-
actly when installing an infant or child restraint.
•
•
•
The restraint must be appropriate for your child’s
weight and height. Check the label on the restraint for
weight and height limits.
A rearward facing child restraint should only be
used in a rear seat, or in the front seat if the
passenger’s front airbag is Off. If the airbag is left
On, a rearward facing child restraint in the front
seat may be struck by a deploying passenger
airbag which may cause severe or fatal injury to
the infant.
Carefully follow the instructions that come with the
restraint. If you install the restraint improperly, it may
not work when you need it.
The passenger seat belts are equipped with cinching
latch plates, which are designed to keep the lap portion
tight around the child restraint so that it is not neces-
sary to use a locking clip. Pulling up on the shoulder
portion of the lap/ shoulder belt will tighten the belt.
The cinching latch plate will keep the belt tight, how-
ever, any seat belt system will loosen with time, so
check the belt occasionally and pull it tight if necessary.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41
•
In the rear seat, you may have trouble tightening the
lap/ shoulder belt on the child restraint because the
buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path
opening on the restraint. Disconnect the latch plate
from the buckle and twist the short buckle-end belt
several times to shorten it. Insert the latch plate into
the buckle with the release button facing out.
•
When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in the
vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle.
Do not leave it loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or
collision, it could strike the occupants or seat backs
and cause serious personal injury.
2
WARNING!
•
•
If the belt still can’t be tightened, or if pulling and
pushing on the restraint loosens the belt, disconnect
the latch plate from the buckle, turn the buckle
around, and insert the latch plate into the buckle
again. If you still can’t make the child restraint secure,
try a different seating position.
Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant
or child restraint. It could come loose in a collision.
The child could be badly injured or killed. Follow
the manufacturers directions exactly when installing
an infant or child restraint.
Buckle the child into the seat according to the child
restraint manufacturers directions.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren (LATCH)
Each vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchor-
age system called LATCH, which stands for Lower
Anchors and Tether for CHildren. LATCH child restraint
anchorage systems are installed in the Standard Cab
passenger seat position, the Club Cab front passenger
and rear outboard right side positions and the Quad Cab
rear seat outboard positions and also feature tether strap
anchorages, which must be used, located behind the
seatback (refer to Child Restraint Tether Anchor later in
this section).
Standard and Club Cab Front Seat
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43
2
Club Cab Rear Right Seat
Quad Cab Rear Right Seat
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Because the lower anchorages are to be introduced to
passenger carrying vehicles over a period of years, child
restraint systems having attachments for those anchor-
ages will continue to have features for installation in
vehicles using the lap or lap/ shoulder belt. They will also
have tether straps, and you are urged to take advantage
of all of the available attachments provided with your
child restraint in any vehicle.
NOTE: If your child restraint seat is not LATCH
compatible, install the restraint using the vehicle seat
belting.
Quad Cab Rear Left Seat
NOTE: For children riding in the front seat of a
Standard Cab model refer to the “Passenger Airbag
On/ Off Switch” located in this section.
Child restraint systems having attachments designed to
connect to the lower anchorages are now available. Child
restraints having tether straps and hooks for connection
to the seatback tether anchorage have been available for
some time. In fact, many child restraint manufacturers
will provide add-on tether strap kits for some of their
older products.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45
Installing the Child Restraint System
WARNING!
In general, you will first loosen the adjusters on the lower
straps and tether straps so that you can more easily attach
the hook or connector to the lower anchorages and tether
anchorages. Then tighten all three straps as you push the
child restraint rearward and downward into the seat.
2
Do not install child restraint systems equipped with
LATCH attachments in the center position of a Quad
Cab model rear seat. The LATCH anchorages in this
seat are designed for the two outboard seating posi-
tions only. A child may be placed in the rear center
seating position of a Quad Cab model using the seat
belt and child tether anchorage. Failure to follow this
may result in serious or fatal injury.
Not all child restraint systems will be installed as we
have described here. Again, carefully follow the instruc-
tions that come with the child restraint system.
WARNING!
Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or
child restraint. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the manufacturers directions exactly
when installing an infant or child restraint.
We urge that you carefully follow the directions of the
manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Many,
but not all, restraint systems will be equipped with
separate straps on each side, with each having a hook or
connector and a means for adjusting the tension in the
strap. Forward-facing toddler restraints and some
rearward-facing infant restraints will also be equipped
with a tether strap, a hook and means for adjusting the
tension in the strap.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Child Restraint Tether Anchor
WARNING!
Regular Cab models have two tether anchorages, one
behind each passenger seating position (front center and
right seat positions). Club Cab and Quad Cab models
have three anchorages, one behind each of the rear seat
positions (rear left, center, and right seat positions).
Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant
or child restraint. It could come loose in a collision.
The child could be seriously injured or killed. Make
sure the child restraint tether strap is always routed
through the proper anchor strap inner loop.
WARNING!
Tether Straps at the Front Passenger’s Seat (Regular
Cab With All Seats)
With a child restraint installed in the rear driver or
passenger side locations, use care when adjusting
the front seat(s) rearward, to avoid the front seat
back coming in contact with the belted child directly
behind the seat. The child could be injured.
1. Route the child restraint tether strap up and over the
passenger seat back.
2. Thread the tether strap through the anchor strap inner
loop (loop with metal ring), located directly behind the
passenger’s seat.
3. Route the tether strap across to the anchor strap
installed in the center, and attach the tether strap hook to
the anchor strap metal ring.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47
4. Remove the slack in the tether strap so that both
anchor straps are pulled tight.
Tether Straps at the Front Center Seat (Regular Cab
With Any Bench Seat)
1. Route the child restraint tether strap up and over the
center seat back.
2
2. Thread the tether strap through the anchor strap inner
loop (loop with metal ring), located directly behind the
center seat.
3. Route the tether strap across to the anchor strap
installed directly behind the passenger’s seat location,
and attach the tether strap hook to the anchor strap metal
ring.
Regular Cab With All Seats
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
4. Remove the slack in the tether strap so that both
anchor straps are pulled tight.
3. Remove the slack in the tether strap so that it is pulled
tight.
Regular Cab With Any Bench Seat
Tether Strap at the Front Passenger Seat (Club Cab)
1. Route the child restraint tether strap up and over the
front passenger seat back.
2. Connect the tether strap to the lower anchorage.
Club Cab Front Passenger Seat
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49
Tether Straps at the Rear Passenger Seat (Club Cab
and Quad Cab Rear Seats)
1. Route the child restraint tether strap through the
anchor strap inner loop (loop with metal ring attached),
located directly behind the child restraint.
2
2. Route the tether strap across to the next nearest
installed anchor strap, and attach the tether strap hook to
the anchor strap metal ring.
3. Remove the slack in the tether strap so that both
anchor straps are pulled tight.
NOTE: Every Club Cab model has a cab-back panel
with a flip-down door (padded bolster). The symbol
below is located on this door.
Club/Quad Cab Rear Seat
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Multiple Child Restraint Installation Sequence
3. After following step 1 for the center child restraint,
route the tether strap hook to the metal ring on the inner
loop, located behind the passenger’s seat. Attach the
tether strap hook to the metal ring
1. Thread the child restraint tether strap hook through
the inner loop, located directly behind the child restraint.
2. After following step 1 for either of the two outer seats,
route the tether strap hook to the metal ring on the inner
loop behind the center seat and attach the hook to the
metal ring.
NOTE: Two Anchors must be used for either of the
three seating positions.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51
2
Multiple Child Restraint
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move the
child closer to the center of the vehicle. If this doesn’t
help, move the child to the center rear seating position
and use the lap belt. Never allow a child to put the
shoulder belt under an arm or behind their back.
WARNING!
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
seat failure and injury to the child. In a collision, the
seat could come loose and allow the child to crash
into the inside of the vehicle or other passengers, or
even be thrown from the vehicle. Use only the
anchor positions directly behind the child restraint
to secure a child restraint top tether strap. See your
dealer for help if necessary.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the engine in
your new vehicle. Drive moderately during the first 300
miles (500 km). After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds
up to 50 or 55 mph (80 or 90 km/ h) are desirable. While
cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration, within the limits
of local traffic laws, contributes to a good break-in.
Children Too Large for Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend
over the front of the seat when their back is against the
seat back should use the lap/ shoulder belt in a rear seat.
Avoid wide open throttle acceleration in low gear.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
high-quality, energy-conserving type lubricant. Oil
changes should be consistent with anticipated climate
conditions under which vehicle operations will occur.
The recommended viscosity and quality grades are
shown in Section 7.
•
•
Make sure that the child is upright in the seat.
The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug
as possible.
•
Check belt fit periodically. A child’s squirming or
slouching can move the belt out of position.
NON-DETERGENT OR STRAIGHT MINERAL OILS
MUST NEVER BE USED.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53
A new engine may consume some oil during its first few
thousand miles of operation. This is a normal part of the
break-in and is not an indication of difficulty.
•
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry
into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine
exhaust system.
2
Be aware of changes in the sound of the exhaust system;
exhaust fumes detected inside the vehicle; or damage to
the underside or rear of the vehicle. Have a competent
mechanic inspect the complete exhaust system and adja-
cent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated or
mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose connections
could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger
compartment. In addition, inspect the exhaust system
each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil
change. Replace or adjust as required.
SAFETY TIPS
Exhaust System
WARNING!
Exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide, an ex-
tremely toxic gas that by itself is colorless and
odorless. To avoid inhaling these gases, the follow-
ing precautions should be observed:
•
•
Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined
areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in
or out of the area.
It may be necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for more than a short period. If so,
adjust your climate control system to force outside air
into the vehicle. Set the blower at high speed and the
controls in any position except OFF or RECIRC.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle
Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The
Vehicle:
Seat Belts
Tires
Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
frays and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced
immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.
Examine tires for tread wear or uneven wear patterns.
Check for stones, nails, glass or other objects lodged in
the tread.
Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after an accident if
they have been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing,
etc.). If there is any question regarding belt or retractor
condition, replace the belt.
Inspect for tread cuts or sidewall cracks. Check wheel
nuts for tightness and tires for proper pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of exterior lights as
you turn them on. Check turn signal and high beam
indicator lights on the instrument panel.
Defrosters
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
the blower control on high speed. You can feel the air
directed against the windshield.
Door Latches
Check for positive closing, latching and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check the area under vehicle after overnight parking for
fuel, water, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected, the cause should be located and
corrected.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
3
Ⅵ Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
▫ Inside Day/ Night Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror— If Equipped . . . .59
▫ Outside Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
▫ Exterior Mirrors Folding Feature . . . . . . . . . . .59
▫ Electric Remote-Control Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . .60
▫ Heated Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
Ⅵ Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
▫ Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
▫ Reclining Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
▫ Lumbar Support Adjustment — Power Seats
Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63
▫ Seatback Releases — Bench Seat . . . . . . . . . . . .63
▫ Seatback Releases—Bucket And Split Bench . . . .64
▫ Club Cab Easy Entry System . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
▫ Club Cab/ Quad Cab Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
Ⅵ To Open And Close The Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . .66
Ⅵ Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
▫ Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
▫ Battery Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68
▫ Headlamp Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68
▫ Headlights, Parking Lights, Panel Lights . . . . . .68
▫ 6 - Way Power Seat Adjuster — Driver’s Side
Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
56 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Daytime Running Lights (Canada Only) . . . . . .69
▫ Lights-On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69
▫ Fog Lights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69
▫ Cargo Light — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70
Ⅵ Multifunction Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70
▫ Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70
▫ Passing Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70
▫ High Beam / Low Beam Select Switch . . . . . . .71
▫ Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
▫ Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
Ⅵ Tilt Steering Column — If Equipped . . . . . . . . .73
Ⅵ Electronic Speed Control — If Equipped . . . . . .74
▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74
▫ To Set At A Desired Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74
▫ To Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74
▫ To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75
▫ To Accelerate For Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75
Ⅵ Overhead Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76
▫ Courtesy/ Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76
Ⅵ Compass/ Temperature Mini-Trip Computer . . .77
▫ US/ M Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77
▫ Reset Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77
▫ Global Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77
▫ Step Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78
▫ Average Fuel Economy (AVG ECO) . . . . . . . . .78
▫ Distance To Empty (DTE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78
▫ Trip Odometer (ODO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78
▫ Elapsed Time (ET) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78
▫ C/ T Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79
▫ Compass/ Temperature Display . . . . . . . . . . . .79
▫ Automatic Compass Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . .79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 57
▫ Manual Compass Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80
▫ Outside Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81
Ⅵ Garage Door Opener . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81
▫ Programming Homelink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
▫ Canadian Programming/ Gate Programming . . .84
▫ Using Homelink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
▫ Erasing Homelink Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
▫ Reprogramming a Single Homelink Button . . . .85
▫ Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
Ⅵ Electrical Power Outlets — If Equipped . . . . . .86
▫ Electrical Outlet Use With Engine Off . . . . . . . .87
Ⅵ Floor Console — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88
▫ Floor Console Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88
Ⅵ Center Storage Compartment — If Equipped . . .89
Ⅵ Cup Holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89
Ⅵ Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90
Ⅵ Slide-In Campers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90
▫ Camper Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91
3
▫ Carbon Monoxide Warning Vehicles Equipped
With A Cap Or Slide-In Campers . . . . . . . . . . .91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
58 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
MIRRORS
Annoying headlight glare can be reduced by moving the
small control under the mirror to the night position
(toward rear of truck). The mirror should be adjusted
while set in the day position (toward windshield).
Inside Day/Night Mirror
The mirror should be adjusted to center on the view
through the rear window. A two-point pivot system
allows for horizontal and vertical adjustment of the
mirror.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 59
Automatic Dimming Mirror— If Equipped
This mirror will automatically adjust for annoying head-
light glare from vehicles behind you. You can turn the
feature on or off by pressing the button at the base of the
mirror. A light in the button will indicate when the
dimming feature is activated.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning,
never spray any cleaning solution directly onto the
mirror. Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and
wipe the mirror clean.
3
Outside Mirrors
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirror(s)
to center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight
overlap of the view obtained on the inside mirror.
Exterior Mirrors Folding Feature
Folding exterior mirrors are hinged and may be moved
either forward or rearward to resist damage. The hinges
have three detent positions; full forward, full rearward,
and normal.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
60 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Electric Remote-Control Mirrors
Set the top switch to the left or right for the left or right
mirror, and set it to the center off position to prevent
accidentally moving a mirror when you are finished
adjusting the mirror. To adjust a mirror, select left or right
with the top switch, and press one of the four arrows for
the direction you want the mirror to move.
The controls for the power mirrors are located on the
driver’s door trim panel.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 61
SEATS
WARNING!
Seat Adjustment
Vehicles and other objects seen in the right side
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away
than they really are. Relying too much on your right
side mirror could cause you to collide with another
vehicle or other object. Use your inside mirror when
judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in the
right side mirror.
The adjusting lever is at the front of the seat, near the
floor. Lift the lever and move the seat to the desired
position.
3
Using body pressure, move forward and rearward on the
seat to be sure the seat adjusters have latched.
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped
Heated mirrors are automatically activated when you
depress the rear window defroster switch located on the
instrument panel. The light will illuminate to indicate
that the heating elements are ON. Turning OFF the
ignition will deactivate the heated mirrors.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
62 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could
cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be
properly adjusted and you could be injured. Adjust
any seat only while the vehicle is parked.
Reclining Seats
Both the bucket seats and the split-bench seats are
equipped with recliners. The reclining mechanism is
operated by a control located on the outboard side of the
seat. To recline, lean forward slightly before lifting the
lever, then push back to the desired angle and release the
lever. Lean forward and lift the lever to return the
seatback to its normal position.
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt and
be seriously or even fatally injured. Use the recliner
only when the vehicle is parked.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 63
6 - Way Power Seat Adjuster — Driver’s Side
Only
The 6-way power seat adjuster switch is on the outboard
side of the driver’s seat. Use this switch to move the seat
up or down, forward or rearward, recline or tilt.
3
Seatback Releases — Bench Seat
The seatback is equipped with inertia latching mecha-
nisms that automatically lock and prevent the seatback
from folding forward during periods of high decelera-
tion, such as hard braking.
Lumbar Support Adjustment — Power Seats Only
Vehicles equipped with the power bucket seat or the
40/ 20/ 40 split bench power are equipped with an adjust-
able lumbar support on the driver’s seat. Rotating the
lever on the left side of the driver’s seatback increases or
decreases the lumbar support.
This type of latch mechanism eliminates the need to
actuate a release lever to fold the seat forward. In some
situations, such as when parked on a steep hill, the inertia
latch may lock and manual release of the lock will be
necessary.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
64 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Seatback Releases—Bucket And Split Bench
Both seats have a position latch release. To release the
seatback if you are on the outside of the vehicle, lift up on
the recliner lever located on the outboard side of the seat.
From the rear seat, lift the lever located on the rear of the
seatback.
recliner lever located on the outboard side of the seat.
From the rear seat, pull the cloth pull-tab located on the
rear or the seat cushion rearward until the latch releases,
and then push the seat forward. The seat will lock in
place when the back is returned to an upright position
and will need to be reset. However, the seat may be slid
rearward before returning the seatback to the upright
position to minimize the amount of readjustment re-
quired.
Club Cab Easy Entry System
NOTE: Power seats are available with the Club or Quad
Cab models only.
CAUTION!
When operating the folding front seat, use care in
repositioning seat to its normal position. This will
prevent shoulder belt harness from being caught
behind seat or tangled in the seatback latching
mechanism.
To allow easier access to the rear seat, the front passenger
seat will move to its full forward position when the
seatback is folded down. To fold the seatback forward if
you are on the outside of the vehicle, lift up on the
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 65
WARNING!
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
3
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
The Club Cab/ Quad Cab rear seat is a 60/ 40 split
cushion and full back. Either cushion can be raised
independently.
Club Cab/Quad Cab Rear Seat
More cargo space is available by lifting up on the rear
seat cushion.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
66 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD
To open the hood, two latches must be released. First pull
the hood release lever located under the left side of the
instrument panel.
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it. Use a firm downward push at the center of the
hood to ensure that both latches engage. Never drive
your vehicle unless the hood is fully closed, with both
latches engaged.
Second, locate the hood safety latch lever between the
front grille openings to the left of center. Push this lever
to the right to release the hood.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 67
Interior Lights
WARNING!
If the hood is not fully latched, it could fly up when
the vehicle is moving and block your forward vision.
Be sure all hood latches are fully latched before
driving.
3
LIGHTS
Courtesy and dome lights are turned on when the front
doors are opened, when the dimmer control (rotating
wheel on the right side of the switch) is rotated to the
second upward detent position, or if equipped, when the
UNLOCK button is pressed on the key fob. Rotating the
dimmer control to the optional fully upward position will
turn on the cargo light located on the back of the cab.
When a door is open and the interior lights are on,
rotating the dimmer control all the way down to the OFF
detent will cause all the interior lights to go out. This is
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
68 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
also known as the ЉPartyЉ mode because it allows the
doors to stay open for extended periods of time without
discharging the vehicle’s battery.
If the headlamps remain on while the ignition is cycled
off, the exterior lights will automatically turn off after 5
minutes. If the headlamps are turned on and left on for 15
minutes while the ignition is off, the exterior lights will
automatically turn off.
The brightness of the instrument panel lighting can be
regulated by rotating the dimmer control up (brighter) or
down (dimmer). When the headlights are ON you can
supplement the brightness of the odometer, trip odom-
eter, radio and overhead console by rotating the control
up until you hear a click. This feature is termed the
“Parade” mode and is useful when headlights are re-
quired during the day.
NOTE: Battery Saver mode is cancelled if the ignition is
ON.
Headlamp Delay
To aid in your exit, your vehicle is equipped with a
headlamp delay that will leave the headlamps on for 60
seconds. This delay is initiated when the ignition is
turned OFF while the headlamp switch is on, and then
the headlamp switch is cycled off. The headlamps will
remain on for 60 seconds. Headlamp delay can be
cancelled by either turning the headlamp switch ON then
OFF or by turning the ignition ON.
Club Cab/ Quad Cab models may have an optional
switched dome lamp that may be operated by pressing
the lens.
Battery Saver
To protect the life of your vehicle’s battery, Load Shed-
ding is provided for both the interior and exterior lights.
Headlights, Parking Lights, Panel Lights
When the headlight switch is rotated to the first
position, the parking lights, taillights, side marker
lights, license plate light and instrument panel
lights are all turned on. The headlights will turn ON
when the switch is rotated to the second position.
If the ignition is off and any door is left ajar for 15
minutes or the dimmer control is rotated upwards for 15
minutes, the interior lights will automatically turn off.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 69
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
wool or other abrasive materials to clean the lenses.
Daytime Running Lights (Canada Only)
The headlights on your vehicle will illuminate when the
engine is started. This provides a constant ЉLights ONЉ
condition until the ignition is turned OFF. The lights
illuminate at less than 50% of normal intensity. If the
parking brake is applied the Daytime Running Lights
will turn off.
3
Lights-on Reminder
If the headlights, parking lights, courtesy lights or cargo
lights are left on, after the ignition is turned off, a chime
will sound when the driver’s door is opened.
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlight lenses
that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage
than glass headlights.
Fog Lights — If Equipped
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
The foglights are turned ON by placing the headlight
rotary control in the parking light or headlight position
and pulling out the headlight rotary control. The fog
lights will operate only when the parking lights are ON
or when the vehicle headlights are ON low beam. An
indicator light located left of the switch will illuminate
when the fog lights are on. The fog lights will turn off
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution fol-
lowed by rinsing.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
70 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
when the switch is pressed in, when the headlight switch
is rotated to the OFF position or the high beam is
selected.
bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is
moved, it would suggest that the fuse or indicator bulb is
defective.
CARGO Light — If Equipped
You can signal a lane change by moving the lever
partially up or down.
The cargo lights are turned on by rotating the dimmer
control to the optional fully upward position. The interior
lights will also turn on when the cargo lights are on. The
cargo lights will also turn on for 30 seconds when a key
fob Unlock is pressed, as part of the illuminated entry
feature.
MULTIFUNCTION CONTROL LEVER
The multifunction control lever is located on the left side
of the steering column.
Turn Signals
Move the lever up or down to signal a right-hand or
left-hand turn.
Passing Light
The arrow on either side of the instrument cluster flashes
to indicate the direction of the turn, and proper operation
of the front and rear turn signal lights. If either indicator
flashes at a faster rate, check for a defective outside light
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
partially pulling the multifunction lever toward the steer-
ing wheel. This will cause the high beam headlights to
turn on until the lever is released.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 71
High Beam / Low Beam Select Switch
Pull the multifunction control lever fully toward the
steering wheel to switch the headlights from HIGH or
LOW beam.
Intermittent Wiper System
Windshield Wipers
3
The wipers and washers are operated by a switch
in the multifunction control lever. Turn the end of
the handle to select the desired wiper speed.
NOTE: In cold weather, always turn off the wiper
switch and allow the wipers to return to the park position
before turning off the engine. If the wiper switch is left on
and the wipers freeze to the windshield, damage to the
wiper motor may occur when the vehicle is restarted.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
72 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield
could lead to an accident. You might not see other
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of
the windshield during freezing weather, warm the
windshield with defroster before and during wind-
shield washer use.
Speed-Sensitive Intermittent Wipe — If Equipped
For vehicles equipped with Speed-Sensitive Intermittent
Wipe, if the vehicle is moving at a speed of less than 10
mph (16 km/ h), the delay time between wipes will be
doubled, resulting in a longer time between wipes (1–36
seconds).
The intermittent feature of this system was designed for
use when weather conditions make a single wiping cycle,
with a variable pause between cycles, desirable. For
maximum delay between cycles, rotate the control knob
into the upper end of the delay range.
Windshield Washers
To use the washer, push in on the knob on the end of the
multifunction control lever and hold while spray is
desired. If the knob is depressed while in the delay range,
the wiper will operate for several seconds after the knob
is released. It will then resume the intermittent interval
The delay interval decreases as you rotate the knob until
it enters the LO continual speed position. The delay can
be regulated from a maximum of about 15 seconds
between cycles, to a cycle every 2 seconds.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 73
previously selected. If the knob is pushed while in the
OFF position, the wiper will wipe approximately three
wipes, after the wash knob is released.
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system
in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or
exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This
rating information can be found on most washer fluid
containers.
3
TILT STEERING COLUMN — IF EQUIPPED
To tilt the column, push down on the lever below the turn
signal control and move the wheel up or down, as
desired. Push the level back up to lock the column firmly
in place.
WARNING!
Tilting the steering column while the vehicle is
moving is dangerous. Without a stable steering col-
umn, you could lose control of the vehicle and have
an accident. Adjust the column only while the ve-
hicle is stopped. Be sure it is locked before driving.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
74 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
When engaged, this device takes over accelerator opera-
tion at speeds greater than 35 mph (56 km/ h). The
controls are mounted on the steering wheel.
To Set At A Desired Speed
When the vehicle has reached the desired speed, press
and release the SET button. Release the accelerator and
the vehicle will operate at the selected speed.
To Deactivate
A soft tap on the brake pedal, normal braking, clutch
pressure while slowing the vehicle, or pressing the CAN-
CEL button will deactivate speed control without erasing
the memory. Pushing the ON/ OFF button to the OFF
position or turning off the ignition erases the memory.
WARNING!
Leaving the Speed Control ON when not in use is
dangerous. You could accidentally set the system to
cause it to go faster than you want. You could lose
control and have an accident. Always leave the
system OFF when you aren’t using it.
To Activate
Push the ON/ OFF button to the ON position. An indi-
cator light in the instrument cluster illuminates when the
system is on.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 75
To Resume Speed
To Accelerate For Passing
To resume a previously set speed, push and release the
RESUME button. Resume can be used at any speed above
50 km/ h (30 mph).
Depress the accelerator as you would normally. When the
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
NOTE: When driving uphill, at elevations above 2,000
feet (610 Meters), or when the vehicle is heavily loaded
(especially when towing) the vehicle may slow below the
SET speed. If the vehicle speed drops below 30 mph (48
km/ h), the speed control will automatically disengage. If
this happens, you can push down on the accelerator
pedal to maintain the desired speed.
To Vary The Speed Setting
3
When the speed control is on, speed can be increased by
pressing and holding the ACCEL button. When the
button is released, a new set speed will be established.
Tapping the ACCEL button once will result in a 2 mph
(3.2 km/ h) speed increase. Each time the button is
tapped, speed increases so that tapping the button three
times will increase speed by 6 mph (9.6 km/ h), etc.
Vehicles equipped with a 5–speed manual transmission
should be operated in 4th gear under the above condi-
tions.
Tapping the COAST button once will result in a 1 mph
(1.6 km/ h) speed decrease. Each time the button is
tapped, speed will decrease. For example, tapping the
button 3 times will decrease the speed by 3 mph (4.8
km/ h), etc.
Vehicles equipped with a 4–speed automatic transmis-
sion may exhibit several 4-3 downshifts under the above
conditions. To reduce the frequency of the downshifts
and to improve vehicle performance, it is advisable to
lock out overdrive by pressing the O/ D OFF button
located at the end of the gear shifter.
To decrease speed while the speed control is on, press
and hold the COAST button. Release the button when the
desired speed is reached, and the new speed will be set.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
76 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
•
•
•
Courtesy Lights
WARNING!
Garage Door Opener — If Equipped
Mini-Trip Computer — If Equipped
Speed Control can be dangerous where the system
can’t maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could
go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose
control. An accident could be the result. Don’t use
Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are
winding, icy, snow-covered, or slippery.
Courtesy/Reading Lights
Near the front of the console are two courtesy/ reading
lights.
Both lights illuminate as courtesy lights when a door is
opened, when the dimmer control is rotated to the
courtesy light position (fully upward position), or when
the UNLOCK button is pressed on the Remote Keyless
Entry transmitter, if so equipped. These lights are also
operated individually as reading lights by pressing the
recessed area of the corresponding lens.
OVERHEAD CONSOLE
The overhead console has the following features:
NOTE: The courtesy/ reading lights will remain on
until the switch is pressed a second time, so be sure they
have been turned off before leaving the vehicle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 77
COMPASS/TEMPERATURE MINI-TRIP COMPUTER
This feature allows you to choose between a compass/
temperature display and one of five trip conditions being
monitored.
RESET Button
US/M Button
Use this button to change the display from U.S. to metric
measurement units.
3
Use this button to reset the following displays to zero:
Average Fuel Economy
Trip Odometer
Elapsed time.
Global Reset
If the RESET button is pressed twice within 3 seconds
while in any of the 3 resetable displays, the Global Reset
will reset all 3 displays.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
78 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Step Button
Distance To Empty (DTE)
This display shows the estimated distance that can be
traveled with the fuel remaining in the tank. The distance
is calculated by multiplying the amount of fuel remain-
ing by the projected fuel economy. The distance predicted
will change every few seconds to a higher or lower
number as these factors change. The DTE will read zero
when the fuel gauge reads “E.”
This display cannot be reset.
Trip Odometer (ODO)
This display shows the distance traveled since the last
reset.
Use this button to choose or cycle through the four trip
conditions.
Elapsed Time (ET)
This display shows the accumulated ignition ON time
since the last reset.
Average Fuel Economy (AVG ECO)
This display shows the average fuel economy since the
last reset.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 79
C/T Button
WARNING!
Even if the display still reads a few degrees above
32°F ( 0°C), the road surface may be icy, particularly
in woods or on bridges. Drive carefully under such
conditions to prevent an accident and possible per-
sonal injury or property damage.
3
Automatic Compass Calibration
The self calibrating feature of the compass eliminates the
need to calibrate the compass for normal conditions.
During a short initial period, the compass may appear
erratic and the CAL symbol will appear on the display.
The CAL symbol may also appear after the vehicle is
subjected to a high level of magnetism. While completing
three 360° turns at about 5 mph (8 km/ h) in an area free
from large metal or metallic objects, the CAL symbol will
turn off and the compass will function normally.
Use this button to select a readout of the outside tem-
perature and one of eight compass headings that indicate
the direction in which the vehicle is facing.
Compass/Temperature Display
This display provides the outside temperature and one of
eight compass readings to indicate the direction the
vehicle is facing.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
80 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Manual Compass Calibration
If the compass appears erratic and the CAL light does not
appear, you must calibrate the compass. Find an open
area away from large metal objects. With the ignition ON
and the compass/ temperature displayed, press and hold
the RESET button until the CAL symbol appears (about
10 seconds). Drive slowly, about 5 mph (8 km/ h), in 3
complete 360° circles. The CAL light will turn off and the
compass will be calibrated.
Variance is the difference between magnetic North and
geographic North. For proper compass function, the
correct variance zone must be set. Refer to the variance
map for the correct variance zone. To check the variance
zone, the ignition must be on and the compass/
temperature displayed. Press and hold the RESET button
for about 5 seconds until VAR appears in the display. The
number displayed is the variance zone used by the
compass. To change the zone, press the STEP button to
scroll through numbers 1 through 15. Press the RESET
button after selecting the proper zone to return to the
normal compass/ temperature display.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 81
Outside Temperature
Because engine temperature can increase the displayed
temperature, temperature readings are slowly updated
when vehicle speed is below 20 mph (30 km/ h).
GARAGE DOOR OPENER
3
The HomeLink Universal Transceiver replaces up to
three remote controls (hand held transmitters) that oper-
ate devices such as garage door openers, motorized
gates, or home lighting. It triggers these devices at the
push of a button. The Universal Transceiver operates off
your vehicle’s battery and charging system; no batteries
are needed.
For additional information on HomeLink, call 1–800–
355–3515, or on the internet at www.homelink.com.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
82 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
1. Press and hold the two outer HomeLink buttons, and
release only when the indicator light begins to flash (after
20 seconds). Do not hold the buttons for longer than 30
seconds and do not repeat step one to program a second
and/ or third hand-held transmitter to the remaining two
HomeLink buttons.
WARNING!
A moving garage door can cause injury to people and
pets in the path of the door. People or pets could be
seriously or fatally injured. Only use this transceiver
with a garage door opener that has a “stop and
reverse” feature as required by federal safety stan-
dards. This includes most garage door opener mod-
els manufactured after 1982. Do not use a garage
door opener without these safety features it could
cause injury or death. Call toll-free 1–800–355–3515
or, on the Internet at www.homelink.com for safety
information or assistance.
Programming HomeLink
NOTE: When programming a garage door opener, it is
advised to park outside the garage. It is also recom-
mended that a new battery be placed in the hand-held
transmitter of the device being programmed to
HomeLink for quicker training and accurate transmis-
sion of the radio-frequency signal.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 83
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the HomeLink
button that you want to train and the hand-held trans-
mitter buttons. Do not release the buttons until step 4
has been completed.
WARNING!
Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a danger-
ous gas. Do not run the vehicle’s exhaust while
training the transceiver. Exhaust gas can cause seri-
ous injury or death.
NOTE: Some gate operators and garage door openers
may require you to replace this Programming Step 3 with
procedures noted in the ЉGate Operator/ Canadian Pro-
grammingЉ section.
3
WARNING!
4. The HomeLink indicator light will flash slowly and
then rapidly after HomeLink successfully receives the
frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Release
both buttons after the indicator light changes from the
slow to the rapid flash.
Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are training the Universal Transceiver. Do
not train the transceiver if people or pets are in the
path of the door or gate. A moving door or gate can
cause serious injury or death to people and pets or
damage to objects.
5. Press and hold the just trained HomeLink button and
observe the indicator light. If the indicator light stays on
constantly, programming is complete and your device
should activate when the HomeLink button is pressed
and released.
2. Position the end of your hand-held transmitter 1-3
inches (3-8 cm) away from the HomeLink buttons while
keeping the indicator light in view.
NOTE: To program the remaining two HomeLink but-
tons, begin with ЉProgrammingЉ step two. Do not repeat
step one.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
84 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
If the indicator light blinks rapidly for two seconds and
then turns to a constant light, continue with ؆Program-
ming؆ steps 6-8 to complete the programming of a rolling
code equipped device (most commonly a garage door
opener).
HomeLink should now activate your rolling code
equipped device.
NOTE: To program the remaining two HomeLink but-
tons, begin with ЉProgrammingЉ step two. Do not repeat
step one. For questions or comments, please contact
HomeLink at www.homelink.com or 1-800-355-3515.
6. At the garage door opener receiver (motor-head unit)
in the garage, locate the ЉlearnЉ or ЉsmartЉ button. This
can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is
attached to the motor-head unit.
Canadian Programming/Gate Programming
Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter sig-
nals to Љtime-outЉ (or quit) after several seconds of
transmission which may not be long enough for
HomeLink to pick up the signal during programming.
Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are
designed to Љtime-outЉ in the same manner.
7. Firmly press and release the ЉlearnЉ or ЉsmartЉ button.
(The name and color of the button may vary by manu-
facturer.)
NOTE: There are 30 seconds in which to initiate step
eight.
If you live in Canada or you are having difficulties
programming a gate operator by using the ЉProgram-
mingЉ procedures (regardless of where you live), replace
؆Programming HomeLink؆ step 3 with the following:
8. Return to the vehicle and firmly press, hold for two
seconds and release the programmed HomeLink button.
Repeat the ؆press/hold/release؆ sequence a second time,
and, depending on the brand of the garage door opener
(or other rolling code equipped device), repeat this
sequence a third time to complete the programming.
NOTE: If programming a garage door opener or gate
operator, it is advised to unplug the device during the
ЉcyclingЉ process to prevent possible overheating.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 85
3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink button
while you press and release every two seconds (ЉcycleЉ)
your hand-held transmitter until the frequency signal has
successfully been accepted by HomeLink. (The indicator
light will flash slowly and then rapidly.) Proceed with
ЉProgrammingЉ step four to complete.
Release both buttons. Do not hold for longer that 30
seconds. HomeLink is now in the train (or learning)
mode and can be programmed at any time beginning
with ЉProgrammingЉ - step 2.
Reprogramming a Single HomeLink Button
To program a device to HomeLink using a HomeLink
button previously trained, follow these steps:
3
Using HomeLink
To operate, simply press and release the programmed
HomeLink button. Activation will now occur for the
trained device (i.e. garage door opener, gate operator,
security system, entry door lock, home/ office lighting,
etc.). For convenience, the hand-held transmitter of the
device may also be used at any time. In the event that
there are still programming difficulties or questions,
contact HomeLink at: www.homelink.com or 1-800-355-
3515.
1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink button. Do
NOT release the button.
2. The indicator light will begin to flash after 20 seconds.
Without releasing the HomeLink button, proceed with
ЉProgrammingЉ step 2
For questions or comments, contact HomeLink at:
www.homelink.com or 1-800-355-3515.
Security
Erasing HomeLink Buttons
If you sell your vehicle, be sure to erase the frequencies.
To erase programming from the three buttons (individual
buttons cannot be erased but can be ЉreprogrammedЉ -
note below), follow the step noted:
To erase all of the previously trained frequencies, hold
down both outside buttons until the green light begins to
flash.
•
Press and hold the two outer HomeLink buttons until
the indicator light begins to flash-after 20 seconds.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
86 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
This device complies with part 15 of FCC rules and with
RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS — IF EQUIPPED
•
•
This device may not cause harmful interference.
This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause undes-
ired operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly ap-
proved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
HomeLink is a trademark owned by Johnson Controls,
Inc.
The optional auxiliary power outlet can provide up to 15
Amps of current for accessories designed for use with the
standard power outlet adapter. The outlet is located in
the lower portion of the instrument panel. It is covered by
a snap on a plastic cap when not in use. As a safety
precaution, this outlet only operates with the ignition
switch ON. When the optional Cigar Lighter heating
element is used, it heats when pushed in and pops out
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 87
automatically when ready for use. To preserve the heat-
ing element, do not hold the lighter in the heating
position.
Electrical Outlet Use With Engine OFF
CAUTION!
All accessories connected to this outlet should be re-
moved or turned OFF when the vehicle is not in use to
protect the battery against discharge.
•
Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not
in use (i.e. cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life
and/or prevent engine starting.
3
•
•
Accessories that draw higher power (i.e. coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.), will discharge the
battery even more quickly. Only use these inter-
mittently and with greater caution.
After the use of high power draw accessories, or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
generator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
88 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
FLOOR CONSOLE — IF EQUIPPED
Floor Console Features
•
•
•
•
Power Outlet inside storage compartment
Storage compartment lamp
Side open armrest lid
Tissue holder & pen holder
Storage Compartments
Some miscellaneous storage compartments and cup
holders have rubber mats at the bottom, the mats are
both removable and dishwasher safe for cleaning pur-
poses. Various storage compartments provide versatile
and useful storage. A coin holder is also provided inside
the console storage compartment.
Cup Holders
The cup holders fit a wide variety of cup and bottle sizes.
To use the adjustable cup holders (only in automatic
transmission vehicles) place your beverage in the cup
holder well, then adjust the movable arms to tightly hold
the beverage.
The Floor Console, available with bucket seats, has the
following features:
•
•
Miscellaneous storage compartments
Adjustable cup holders - with Automatic Transmission
only
Power Outlet and Portable Phone Storage
The console is equipped with a power outlet, portable
phone storage bin, and phone cord routing. The phone
•
•
Portable phone storage bin
Portable phone cord routing
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 89
storage bin can be used when ease access to the phone is
needed. Also the power outlet inside console compart-
ment can be used to power up the phone while it is being
stored in the bin. To use plug in the portable power
recharge cord and place the cord along the slot provided
in the left side of the console. Close the console armrest
lid and plug the power cord into the phone while resting
the phone in the bin. The power outlet may be used for
any portable item with a standard 12 volt power plug.
CENTER STORAGE COMPARTMENT — IF
EQUIPPED
The center portion of the seat folds down to provide an
armrest with unique storage compartments under the lid.
Push the button on the armrest to raise the lid. Compart-
ments include a holder which will accommodate five
compact disks with finger notches for easier access, a
pencil tray, a coin holder, and a large open area for
miscellaneous items.
3
Storage compartment lamp
CUP HOLDERS
A storage compartment lamp illuminates the console
storage compartment when the armrest lid is opened,
and turns off when the armrest lid is closed or when the
lamp plunger has been pressed.
If your vehicle has bucket seats with a center console,
there are three cup holders located on the console. Refer
to the section on floor console.
A removable pull-out two-cavity cup holder is available
on all Quad Cab rear seats. It is stored in the front of the
seat cushion and has two-way adjustable arms accommo-
dating a wide range of cup sizes. A push-button latch on
the dishwasher-safe cup holder releases it from its recep-
tacle.
Side Open Armrest Lid
Pressing the button on the left side of the console opens
the console armrest lid. The armrest lid will remain open
and the lamp will remain illuminated until armrest lid is
closed manually be pressing the lid back into place. A
penholder is provided on the inside of the armrest lid. A
tissue holder is also provided on the inside of the armrest
lid, which holds a pocket size soft pack of tissue.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
90 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
When using your Quad Cab rear seat cup holder make
sure that you pull the cup holder out fully to engage the
cup holder arms.
3. Lift the tailgate off of the pivot on the passenger side
by pulling upward and rearward at the same time.
4. Slide the tailgate to the passenger side while making
sure clearance from the box and taillight is maintained.
TAILGATE
To simplify mounting of a camper unit with an overhang,
the tailgate can be removed quickly. Follow these steps:
To reinstall the tailgate, do the following:
1. Slide the tailgate onto the driver’s side pivot.
1. Open the tailgate to a 45° angle.
2. Hold the tailgate at a 45° angle and insert it into the
passenger side pivot.
2. Unclip and remove the cables from the box while
maintaining a 45° angle.
3. Clip the cables to the box.
SLIDE-IN CAMPERS
Camper Applications
Certain truck models are not recommended for slide-in
campers. To determine if your vehicle is excluded, please
refer to the Consumer Information Truck-Camper Load-
ing document located in your Owner’s Manual packet or
available from your dealer. For safety reasons, follow all
instructions on this important document.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 91
General Information
Carbon Monoxide Warning Vehicles Equipped
With A Cap or Slide-In Campers
To avoid inhaling carbon monoxide, which is deadly, the
exhaust system on vehicles equipped with “Cap or
Slide-In Campers” should extend beyond the overhang-
ing camper compartment and be free of leaks.
The Manufacturer’s Warranty does not apply to body
modifications and special equipment, such as a camper
unit, heaters, stoves, refrigerators, etc., supplied by
manufacturers other than the manufacturer. For warranty
coverage and service on these items, contact the appli-
cable manufacturer.
3
To mount a camper unit with an overhang, the tailgate
can be removed. Unlatch tailgate and remove support
cables from the retainer pins. Raise right side of tailgate
until the lower right side pivot clears the hanger bracket.
Then slide the tailgate to the right to remove.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
CONTENTS
Ⅵ Instruments And Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
Ⅵ Four Gauge Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
Ⅵ Six Gauge Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
Ⅵ Instrument Cluster Description . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
Ⅵ Electronic Digital Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
▫ Clock Setting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
▫ Tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
▫ PTY (Program Type) Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
▫ Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
▫ Fade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
▫ Tone Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
▫ AM/ FM Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
▫ Scan Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
▫ To Set The Radio Push-Button Memory . . . . . . 108
▫ To Change From Clock To Radio Mode . . . . . . 109
▫ Operating Instructions — Tape Player . . . . . . . 109
▫ Seek Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
4
Ⅵ Sales Code RAZ—AM/ FM Stereo Radio With
Cassette Tape Player, CD Player And CD
Changer Controls — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . 106
▫ Operating Instructions — Radio . . . . . . . . . . . 106
▫ Power Switch, Volume Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
▫ Seek Button (Radio Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
94 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
▫ Fast Forward (FF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
▫ Rewind (RW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
▫ Tape Eject . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
▫ Scan Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
▫ Changing Tape Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
▫ Metal Tape Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
▫ Pinch Roller Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
▫ Noise Reduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
▫ Operating Instructions — CD Player . . . . . . . . 110
▫ Inserting The Compact Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
▫ Seek Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
▫ EJT CD (Eject) Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
▫ FF/ Tune/ RW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
▫ Program Button 4 (Random Play) . . . . . . . . . . 112
▫ Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
▫ Tape CD Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
▫ Time Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
▫ Scan Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
▫ CD Changer Control Capability — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Ⅵ Sales Code RBK—AM/ FM Stereo Radio
With CD Player And CD Changer Controls . . . 114
▫ Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
▫ CD Player Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
▫ CD Changer Control Capability — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
▫ Radio Display Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Ⅵ Sales Code RBB—AM/ FM Stereo Radio With
Cassette Tape Player And CD Changer
Capability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
▫ Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
▫ Power Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
▫ Electronic Volume Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 95
▫ Seek . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
▫ Tune . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
▫ To Set The Push-Button Memory . . . . . . . . . . 120
▫ Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
▫ Fade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
▫ Bass And Treble Tone Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
▫ AM/ FM Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
▫ Mode Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
▫ Cassette Player Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Ⅵ Remote Sound System Controls — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
▫ Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
▫ Tape Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
▫ CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Ⅵ Cassette Tape And Player Maintenance . . . . . . 131
Ⅵ Compact Disc Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Ⅵ Radio Operation And Cellular Phones . . . . . . . 132
Ⅵ Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
▫ Heater Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
▫ Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
▫ Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
▫ Operation Tips Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Ⅵ Rear Window Defroster – Quad-Cab Only . . . . 140
4
▫ CD Changer Control Capability — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
▫ Radio Display Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Ⅵ Sales Code RBQ—AM/ FM Stereo Radio
With 6 - Disc CD Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
▫ Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
▫ CD Player Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
96 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 97
FOUR GAUGE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
98 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
SIX GAUGE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 99
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTION
The gage pointer will remain near its last reading when
the engine is turned off. It will return to a true reading
when the engine is restarted.
1. Engine Coolant Temperature Gage
The temperature gage indicates engine coolant
temperature. Any reading within the normal
range indicates that the cooling system is oper-
ating satisfactorily. The gage needle in V6 and V8
engines will likely indicate a high temperature when
driving in hot weather, up mountain grades, in heavy
traffic, or when towing a trailer. If the needle rises to
260° (hot mark), stop the vehicle, shift into N (Neutral)
and elevate engine speed for 2-3 minutes. If the
temperature reading does not return to normal, seek
authorized service immediately.
2. Voltage Gage – If Equipped
When the engine is running, the gage will
indicate the electrical system voltage. During
normal electrical load, the pointer will remain near the
center of the scale. If the pointer moves to either the
high or low sections, and remains there during normal
driving, the electrical system should be serviced.
4
3. Tachometer
This gage measures engine revolutions per minute (rpm
x 1000).
4. Shift Indicator Light
CAUTION!
A small triangle lights to signal the most economical shift
point for vehicles equipped with a manual transmission.
See the Manual Transmission Operating description in
section 5 of this manual for details.
Do not leave your vehicle unattended with the
engine running as you would not be able to react to
the temperature indicator if the engine overheats.
5. Turn Signal Indicators
When a turn signal is activated, a right-pointing or
left-pointing arrow lights up and flashes to indicate the
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
100 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
direction of the turn. These indicators also indicate
proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.
If either indicator flashes at a faster rate than normal,
check for a defective bulb. If either indicator fails to light
up when the lever is moved, check for a defective fuse or
turn signal bulb. A continuous low chime is activated
when the left/ right turn signal is left on with the engine
RPM vehicle speed greater than 15 mph (24 km/ h) for
more than 1 mi. (1.6 km)
oil gage does not indicate the amount of oil in the
engine. See section 7 for the oil level checking proce-
dure.
9. Fuel Gage
This gage shows the level of fuel in tank when
the ignition switch is in the ON position.
10. Gear Selector
The electronic gear selector display is self-contained
within the instrument cluster. It displays the position of
the automatic transmission shift lever, and the relation of
each position to all other positions. For a good signal the
display will place a box around the selected transmission
range (PRND21). If the PRNDL displays only the char-
acters PRND21 (no boxes) or PRND21 with all boxes on,
have the system checked by an authorized dealer.
6. High Beam Indicator
This light indicates that headlights are on high
beam.
7. Speedometer
This gage shows vehicle speed in miles per hour and
kilometers per hour.
8. Oil Pressure Gage – If Equipped
11. O/D (Overdrive) OFF Indicator (Automatic
Transmissions Only
This light will illuminate when the overdrive off button
has been selected.
This gage indicates engine oil pressure. Any
reading within the normal range indicates that
the engine oil system is operating satisfactorily. A
continuous high or low reading under normal operat-
ing conditions may indicate a lubrication system mal-
function. Immediate service should be obtained. The
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 101
12. Seat Belt Reminder Light
position is out of park for automatic transmissions, or the
engine RPM is greater than 0 for manual transmissions.
This light comes on for several seconds after the
ignition is turned ON as a reminder to “buckle
up.” This light will remain on as long as the seat
belt remains unbuckled. If this light flashes, it indi-
cates a fault in the airbag system. Have the system
checked by an authorized dealer.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is neces-
sary. Operating the vehicle in this condition is danger-
ous!
15. SERVICE 4WD Indicator
4
This light monitors the electric shift 4WD
system. This light will come on when the
ignition key is turned to the ON position and
will stay on for 2 seconds. If the light stays
on or comes on during driving, it means that the 4WD
system is not functioning properly and that service is
required.
13. Low Washer Fluid Indicator
This light comes on when the washer fluid level falls
below approximately 1/ 4 full. The light will remain on
until fluid is added and ignition switch is cycled.
14. Brake System Warning Light
This light will light when the ignition key is turned to the
ON position and will remain on for a few seconds. If the
light stays on, it may be an indication that the parking
brake has not been released, or there is a low brake fluid
level. If the light remains on when the parking brake has
been disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on
the master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake
hydraulic system malfunction. In this case, the light will
remain on until the cause is corrected. If the parking
brake is applied, the light will flash when the gear
16. Check Gages
This light illuminates when the Voltmeter, En-
gine Oil Pressure or Engine Coolant Tempera-
ture gages indicate a reading either too high or too
low. Examine the gages carefully, and follow the
instructions above for each indicated problem.
NOTE: When the ignition switch is turned to OFF, the
Fuel Gage, Voltmeter, Oil Pressure and Engine Coolant
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
102 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
Temperature gages may not show accurate readings.
When the engine is not running, turn the ignition switch
to ON to obtain accurate readings.
portion of the brake system is not functioning and that
service is required. See your authorized dealer imme-
diately.
17. Airbag Indicator
20. Transmission Oil Temperature Warning Light
This light indicates that there is excessive
transmission fluid temperature that might
occur with severe usage such as trailer tow-
ing. If this light comes on, stop the vehicle
and run the engine at idle or faster, with the transmis-
sion in NEUTRAL until the light goes off.
The indicator lights and remains lit for 6 to 8
seconds when the ignition is first turned ON. If
the light does not come on when the ignition is first
turned on, or the light stays on or comes on while
driving, have the airbag system checked by an autho-
rized dealer.
18. Low Fuel Warning Light
21. Security
This indicator lights when the fuel gauge reads
1/ 8 of a tank or less.
The light will flash rapidly for approximately 15 seconds
when the vehicle theft alarm is arming. The light will
flash at a slower rate after the alarm is set. The security
light will also come on for about three seconds when the
ignition is first turned ON.
19. ABS Warning Light
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake Sys-
tem which is described elsewhere in this
manual. This light will come on when the
ignition key is turned to the ON position and
may stay on for 5 seconds. If this light remains on or
comes on during driving, it indicates that the anti-lock
22. Cargo Lamp
The Cargo Lamp light will illuminate when the Cargo
Lamp is activated from the Head Lamp switch.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 103
23. Malfunction Indicator Light
CAUTION!
This light is part of an onboard diagnostic
system which monitors the emissions and en-
gine control system. If the vehicle is ready for
emissions testing the light will come on when the
ignition is first turned on and remain on, as a bulb
check, until the engine is started. If the vehicle is not
ready for emissions testing the light will come on
when the ignition is first turned on and remain on for
15 seconds, then blink for 5 seconds, and remain on
until the vehicle is started. If the bulb does not come
on during starting, have the condition investigated
promptly.
Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
damage to the engine control system. It also could
affect fuel economy and driveability.
If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic converter
damage and power loss will soon occur. Immediate
service is required.
4
24. Door Ajar
The Door Ajar light will illuminate when the
ignition is ON and either one of the passen-
ger doors is opened.
If this light comes on and remains on while driving, it
suggests a potential engine control problem and the need
for system service.
25. Odometer/Trip Odometer Button
Press this button to toggle between the odometer and the
trip odometer display. Holding the button in resets the
trip odometer reading.
Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
need towing, see your dealer for service as soon as
possible.
26. Odometer/Trip Odometer
The odometer shows the total distance the vehicle has
been driven.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
104 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
U.S. federal regulations require that upon transfer of
vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the purchaser the
correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven. There-
fore, if the odometer reading is changed during repair or
replacement, be sure to keep a record of the reading
before and after the service so that the correct mileage can
be determined.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If the temperature light is on,
pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with
the air conditioner turned off until the light turns
off. If the if the light remains on, turn the engine off
immediately, and call for service.
The trip odometer shows individual trip mileage. To
toggle between the odometer and the trip odometer,
press the Odometer/ Trip Odometer Button.
WARNING!
27. Cruise Light
This indicator lights when the electronic speed control
system is turned on.
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call a service center if your
vehicle overheats. If you decide to look under the
hood yourself, see Section 7 of this manual. Follow
the warnings under the Cooling System Pressure
Cap paragraph.
28. Coolant Temperature Light (Clusters Without A
Gauge)
This light warns of an overheated engine con-
dition. For a bulb check, this light will come on
momentarily when the ignition is turned On. If
the light turns on while driving, stop the vehicle and
shut off the engine as soon as possible.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 105
29. Engine Oil Pressure Indicator Light (Clusters
Without A Gauge)
ELECTRONIC DIGITAL CLOCK
The clock and radio each use the display panel built into
the radio. A digital readout shows the time in hours and
minutes whenever the ignition switch is in the “ON” or
“ACC” position.
This light indicates that the engine oil pressure
has become too low. For a bulb check, this light
will come on momentarily when the ignition is turned
On. If the light turns on while driving, stop the vehicle
and shut off the engine as soon as possible. Immediate
service should be obtained.
When the ignition switch is in the “OFF” position, or
when the radio frequency is being displayed, time keep-
ing is accurately maintained.
4
30. Voltage Light (Clusters Without A Gauge)
This light monitors the electrical system volt-
age. The light should turn on momentarily as
the engine is started. If the light stays on or turns on
while driving, it indicates a problem with the charging
system. Immediate service should be obtained.
Clock Setting Procedure
1. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” or “ACC”
position. Using the point of a ballpoint pen or similar
object, press either the “H” (Hour) or “M” (Minute)
buttons on the radio. The display will show the time.
2. Press the “H” button to set hours or the “M” button to
set minutes. The time setting will increase each time you
press a button.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
106 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
SALES CODE RAZ—AM/ FM STEREO RADIO
WITH CASSETTE TAPE PLAYER, CD PLAYER
AND CD CHANGER CONTROLS — IF EQUIPPED
Seek Button (Radio Mode)
Press and release the Seek button to search for the next
station in either the AM or FM mode. Press the top of the
button to seek up and the bottom to seek down. Holding
the button will by pass stations until you release the
button.
Tuning
Press the TUNE control up or down to increase or
decrease the frequency. If you press and hold the button,
the radio will continue to tune until you release the
button. The frequency will be displayed and continu-
ously updated while the button is pressed.
Operating Instructions — Radio
PTY (Program Type) Button
NOTE: Power to operate the radio is controlled by the
ignition switch. It must be in the ON or ACC position to
operate the radio.
Pressing this button once will turn on the PTY mode for
5 seconds. If no action is taken during the 5 second time
out the PTY icon will turn off. Pressing the PTY button
within 5 seconds will allow the program format type to
be selected. Many radio stations do not currently broad-
cast PTY information.
Power Switch, Volume Control
Press the ON/ VOL control to turn the radio on. Turn the
volume control clockwise to increase the volume. The
volume will be displayed and continuously updated
while the button is pressed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 107
Toggle the PTY button to select the following format
types:
Program Type
Radio Display
Soft
Soft
Program Type
Adult Hits
Radio Display
Adlt Hit
Soft Rock
Soft Rck
Soft R&B
Sports
Soft Rhythm and Blues
Classical
Classicl
Cls Rock
College
Country
Inform
Jazz
Sports
Talk
Classic Rock
College
Talk
4
Top 40
Weather
Top 40
Weather
Country
Information
Jazz
By pressing the SEEK button when the PTY icon is
displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency
station with the same selected PTY name. The PTY
function only operates when in the FM mode.
Foreign Language
News
Language
News
Nostalgia
Oldies
Nostalga
Oldies
The radio display will flash “SEEK” and the selected PTY
program type when searching for the next PTY station. If
no station is found with the selected PTY program type,
the radio will return to the last preset station.
Personality
Public
Persnlty
Public
Rhythm and Blues
Religious Music
Religious Talk
Rock
R & B
If a preset button is activated while in the PTY (Program
Type) mode, the PTY mode will be exited and the radio
will tune to the preset station.
Rel Musc
Rel Talk
Rock
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
108 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
Pressing PTY, then SCAN will scan the FM Band and stop
at all RDS stations. Each RDS station will be played for a
5 second scan once around the FM Band and stop at the
last station. The PTY icon will then turn off.
AM/FM Selection
Press the AM/ FM button to change from AM to FM. The
operating mode will be displayed next to the station
frequency. The display will show ST when a stereo
station is received.
Balance
The Balance control adjusts the left-to-right speaker bal-
ance. Push in the button and it will pop out. Adjust the
balance and push the button back in. The balance will be
displayed and continuously updated while the button is
turned.
Scan Button
Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
the next station, in either AM or FM, pausing for 5
seconds at each listenable station before continuing to the
next.
Fade
Pressing the AM/ FM button continues the search in the
alternate frequency band.
The Fade control provides for balance between the front
and rear speakers. Push in the button and it will pop out.
Adjust the balance and push the button back in. The fade
will be displayed and continuously updated while the
button is turned.
To stop the search, press SCAN a second time.
To Set The Radio Push-button Memory
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to push-button memory, press the SET button.
SET 1 will show in the display window. Select the
push-button you wish to lock onto this station and press
and release that button. If a station is not selected within
Tone Control
Slide the Bass and/ or Treble controls up or down to
adjust the sound for the desired tone. The treble, and bass
will be displayed and continuously updated while the
slide is moved.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 109
5 seconds after pressing the SET button, the station will
continue to play but will not be locked into push-button
memory.
be experienced due to a defective cassette tape. Clean and
demagnetize the tape heads at least twice a year.
Seek Button
You may add a second station to each push-button by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in
both AM and FM. This allows a total of 10 AM and 10 FM
stations to be locked into memory. You can recall the
stations stored in SET 2 memory by pressing the push-
button twice.
Press the SEEK button up for the next selection on the
tape and down to return to the beginning of the current
selection.
4
Press the SEEK button up or down to move the track
number to skip forward or backward 1 to 6 selections.
Press the SEEK button once to move 1 selection, twice to
move 2 selections, etc.
Fast Forward (FF)
To Change From Clock To Radio Mode
Press the Time button to change the display between
radio frequency and time.
Press the FF button up momentarily to advance the tape
in the direction that it is playing. The tape will advance
until the button is pressed again or the end of the tape is
reached. At the end of the tape, the tape will play in the
opposite direction.
Operating Instructions — Tape Player
Insert the cassette with the exposed tape side toward the
right and the mechanical action of the player will gently
pull the cassette into the play position.
Rewind (RW)
Press the RW button momentarily to reverse the tape
direction. The tape will reverse until the button is pressed
again or until the end of the tape is reached. At the end of
the tape, the tape will play in the opposite direction.
NOTE: When subjected to extremely cold temperatures,
the tape mechanism may require a few minutes to warm
up for proper operation. Sometimes poor playback may
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
110 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
Tape Eject
Noise Reduction
Press the EJT Tape button and the cassette will disengage
and eject from the radio.
The Dolby Noise Reduction System* is on whenever the
tape player is on, but may be switched off.
Scan Button
To turn off the Dolby Noise reduction System: Press the
Dolby button (button 2) after you insert the tape. The NR
light in the display will go off when the Dolby System is
off. The Dolby System is automatically reactivated each
time a tape is inserted.
Press this button to play 10 seconds of each selection.
Press the scan button a second time to cancel the feature.
Changing Tape Direction
If you wish to change the direction of tape travel (side
being played), press the PTY button. The lighted arrow in
the display window will show the new direction.
* ”Dolby” noise reduction manufactured under license
from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Dolby
and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Labo-
ratories Licensing Corporation.
Metal Tape Selection
If a standard metal tape is inserted into the player, the
player will automatically select the correct equalization
and the 70 symbol will appear in the display window.
Operating Instructions — CD Player
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position and the volume control ON before the CD player
will operate.
Pinch Roller Release
If ignition power or the radio ON/ OFF switch are turned
off, the pinch roller will automatically retract to protect
the tape from any damage. When power is restored to the
tape player, the pinch roller will automatically reengage
and the tape will resume play.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 111
•
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio
OFF, the CD will automatically be pulled into the CD
Player and the display will show the time of day. If
you insert a disc with the ignition OFF, the display will
show the time of day for about 5 seconds, then go out.
CAUTION!
3
This CD player will accept 4 ⁄4 inch (12 cm) discs
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
CD player mechanism.
Seek Button
Press the top of the SEEK button for the next selection on
the CD. Press the bottom of the button to return to the
beginning of the current selection, or return to the
beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the
first 10 seconds of the current selection.
Inserting The Compact Disc
4
The CD player contained within the radio is not a
multi-disc changer, and will only accept one CD. Gently
insert one CD into the CD player with the CD label facing
up. The CD will automatically be pulled into the CD
Player.
EJT CD (Eject) Button
Press this button and the disc will unload and move to
the entrance for easy removal. The unit will switch to the
radio mode.
If the volume control is ON, the unit will switch from
radio to CD mode and begin to play. The display will
show the track number and index time in minutes and
seconds. Play will begin at the start of track one.
If you do not remove the disc within 15 seconds, it will be
reloaded. The radio mode will continue to appear.
NOTE:
•
You may eject a disc with the radio OFF. The ignition
switch must be in the ON or ACC position to insert a
disc with the radio OFF.
The disc can be ejected with the radio OFF.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
112 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
FF/TUNE/RW
To select Satellite Radio (if equipped), press the MODE
button until the word SIRIUS appears. The following will
be displayed in this order: After three seconds, the
current channel name and number will be displayed for
five seconds. The current program type and channel
number will then be displayed for five seconds. The
current channel name and number will then be displayed
until an action occurs. A CD or tape may remain in the
player while in the Satellite Radio mode.
Press FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will begin to
fast forward until FF is released. The RW ( Reverse)
button works in a similar manner.
Program Button 4 (Random Play)
Press this button while the CD is playing to activate
Random Play. This feature plays the tracks on the se-
lected disc in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace.
Tape CD Button
Press this button to select between CD player and Tape
player.
Press the SEEK button to move to the next randomly
selected track.
Press TUNE FF to fast forward through the tracks. Press
the FF button a second time to stop the fast forward
feature. If TUNE RW is pressed, the current track will
reverse to the beginning of the track and begin playing.
Time Button
Press this button to change the display from elapsed CD
playing time to time of day.
Scan Button
Press button 4 a second time to stop Random Play.
Press this button to play the first 10 seconds of each track.
To stop the scan function, press the button a second time.
MODE
Press the MODE button to select between the tape player,
CD player, or satellite radio (if equipped).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 113
CD Changer Control Capability — If Equipped
This radio is compatible with a remote mounted CD
changer available through Mopar Accessories. The fol-
lowing instructions are for the radio controls that operate
this CD changer.
Random Play (RND)
Press the Random button to play the tracks on the
selected disc in random order for an interesting change of
pace.
Random can be cancelled by pressing the button a second
time or by ejecting the CD from the changer.
Mode Button
To activate the CD changer, press the MODE button until
CD information appears on the display.
4
CD Diagnostic Indicators
When driving over a very rough road, the CD player may
skip momentarily. Skipping will not damage the disc or
the player, and play will resume automatically.
Push-Button
While the CD changer is playing, press the NUMBER 1
push-button or the NUMBER 5 push-button to select a
disc numbered higher or lower than the one currently
being played.
As a safeguard and to protect your CD player, one of the
following warning symbols may appear on your display.
A CD HOT symbol indicates the player is too hot.
Seek Button
Press the SEEK up or down to select another track on the
same disc. A SEEK symbol will appear on the display.
CD HOT will pause the operation. Play can be resumed
when the operating temperature is corrected or another
MODE is selected.
Fast Forward And Rewind Buttons
Press and hold the FF button for fast forward. Press and
hold the RW button for fast reverse.
An ERR symbol will appear on the display if the laser is
unable to read the Disc data for the following reasons:
The audio output can be heard when fast forward and
fast reverse are activated.
•
Excessive vibration
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
114 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
•
•
•
Disc inserted upside down
Damaged disc
Radio Operation
Power/Volume Control
Press the ON/ VOL control to turn the radio on. Turn the
volume control clockwise to increase the volume.
Water condensation on optics
SALES CODE RBK—AM/ FM STEREO RADIO
WITH CD PLAYER AND CD CHANGER
CONTROLS
NOTE: Power to operate the radio is supplied through
the ignition switch. It must be in the ON or ACC position
to operate the radio.
Seek
Press and release the SEEK button to search for the next
station in either the AM or FM mode. Press the top of the
button to seek up and the bottom to seek down. The
radio will remain tuned to the new station until you
make another selection. Holding the button in will by-
pass stations without stopping until you release it.
Tune
Press the TUNE control up or down to increase or
decrease the frequency. If you press and hold the button,
the radio will continue to tune until you release the
button. The frequency will be displayed and continu-
ously updated while the button is pressed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 115
Balance
To Set The Radio Push-Button Memory
The Balance control adjusts the left-to-right speaker bal-
ance. Press the BAL button in and it will pop out. Adjust
the balance and push the button back in.
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to push-button memory, press the SET button.
SET 1 will show in the display window. Select the “1–5”
button you wish to lock onto this station and press and
release that button. If a button is not selected within 5
seconds after pressing the SET button, the station will
continue to play but will not be locked into push-button
memory.
Fade
The Fade control provides for balance between the front
and rear speakers. Press the FADE button in and it will
pop out. Adjust the balance and push the button back in.
4
Bass and Treble Tone Control
You may add a second station to each push-button by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in
both AM and FM. This allows a total of 10 AM and 10 FM
stations to be locked into push-button memory. The
stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by
pressing the push-button twice. Every time a preset
button is used a corresponding button number will be
displayed.
The tone controls consist of 2 separate bands. The bass
band is on the left, and the treble band is on the right.
Each band is adjusted by a slider control with a detent at
the mid-position. Moving the control up or down in-
creases or decreases amplification of that band. The mid
position provides a balanced output.
AM/FM Selection
Press the AM/ FM button to change from AM to FM. The
operating mode will be displayed next to the station
frequency. The display will show ST when a stereo
station is received.
Time
Press the TIME button to change the display between
radio frequency and time.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
116 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
General Information
Inserting The Compact Disc
CAUTION!
This radio complies with Part 15 of FCC rules and with
RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
3
This CD player will accept 4 ⁄4 inch (12 cm) discs
1. This device may not cause harmful interference,
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
CD player mechanism.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
You may either insert or eject a disc with the radio OFF.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressively ap-
proved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio
OFF, the display will show the time of day.
If the power is ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD
mode and begin to play when you insert the disc. The
display will show the track number and index time in
minutes and seconds. Play will begin at the start of track
one.
CD Player Operation
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position and the volume control ON before the CD player
will operate.
Seek
Press the top of the SEEK button for the next selection on
the CD. Press the bottom of the button to return to the
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 117
beginning of the current selection, or return to the
beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the
first second of the current selection.
Press the SEEK button to move to the next randomly
selected track.
Press the RND (button 4) button a second time to stop
Random Play.
EJT — Eject
Press the EJT button and the disc will unload and move
to the entrance for easy removal. The unit will switch to
the radio mode.
Mode
Press the MODE button repeatedly to select between the
CD player, the optional remote CD changer and the
Satellite Radio (if equipped). When Satellite Radio (if
equipped) is selected “SA” will appear in your radio
display.
4
If you do not remove the disc within 15 seconds, it will be
reloaded. The unit will continue in radio mode.
The disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
A CD or tape may remain in the player while in the
Satellite mode.
FF/TUNE/RW
Press FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will begin to
fast forward until FF is released. The RW ( Reverse)
button works in a similar manner.
Time
Press the TIME button to change the display from
elapsed CD playing time to time of day.
Random Play — RND/Program Button 4
Press the RND (button 4) button while the CD is playing
to activate Random Play. This feature plays the tracks on
the selected disc in random order to provide an interest-
ing change of pace.
CD Changer Control Capability — If Equipped
This radio is compatible with a remote mounted CD
changer available through Mopar Accessories. The fol-
lowing instructions are for the radio controls that operate
this CD changer.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
118 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
Mode Button
To activate the CD changer, press the MODE button until
CD information appears on the display.
Random can be cancelled by pressing the button a second
time or by ejecting the CD from the changer.
CD Diagnostic Indicators
Push-Button
When driving over a very rough road, the CD player may
skip momentarily. Skipping will not damage the disc or
the player, and play will resume automatically.
While the CD changer is playing, press the NUMBER 1
push-button or the NUMBER 5 push-button to select a
disc numbered higher or lower than the one currently
being played.
As a safeguard and to protect your CD player, one of the
following warning symbols may appear on your display.
Seek Button
A CD HOT symbol indicates the player is too hot.
Press the SEEK up or down to select another track on the
same disc. A SEEK symbol will appear on the display.
CD HOT will pause the operation. Play can be resumed
when the operating temperature is corrected or another
MODE is selected.
Fast Forward And Rewind Buttons
Press and hold the FF button for fast forward. Press and
hold the RW button for fast reverse.
An ERR symbol will appear on the display if the laser is
unable to read the Disc data for the following reasons:
The audio output can be heard when fast forward and
fast reverse are activated.
•
•
•
•
Excessive vibration
Random Play (RND)
Disc inserted upside down
Damaged disc
Press the Random button to play the tracks on the
selected disc in random order for an interesting change of
pace.
Water condensation on optics
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 119
Radio Display Messages
Your radio has been designed to display certain messages
when a problem is detected with the CD player.
SALES CODE RBB—AM/FM STEREO RADIO
WITH CASSETTE TAPE PLAYER AND CD
CHANGER CAPABILITY
4
Operating Instructions
NOTE: Power to operate the radio is supplied through
the ignition switch. It must be in the ON or ACC position
to operate the radio.
NOTE: When first learning the control functions, the
user should set the controls as shown in the following
list.
Tone Controls…As illustrated.
Speaker Control…Centered.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
120 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
Power Button
make another selection. Holding the button will bypass
stations without stopping until you release it.
The volume control/ power button pops out when
pressed, this turns the sound system ON in the mode last
used. Pushing the button back in turns the sound system
OFF.
Tune
Press the TUNE control up or down to increase or
decrease the frequency. If the button is pushed and held,
the radio will continue to tune until the button is
released. The frequency will be displayed and continu-
ously updated while the button is pushed.
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning the
volume control to the right increases the volume and to
the left decreases it.
To Set The Push-Button Memory
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to push-button memory, press the SET button.
The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window.
Select the “1–5” button you wish to lock onto this station
and press and release that button. If a button is not
selected within 5 seconds after pressing the SET button,
the station will continue to play but will not be locked
into push-button memory.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.
For your convenience, the volume can be turned down,
but not up, when the audio system is off and the ignition
is ON.
Seek
Press and release the SEEK button to search for the next
station in either the AM or FM mode. Press the top of the
button to seek up and the bottom to seek down. The
radio will remain tuned to the new station until you
You may add a second station to each push-button by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in
both AM and FM. This allows a total of 10 AM and 10 FM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 121
stations to be locked into push-button memory. The
stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by
pressing the push-button twice.
AM/FM Selection
Press the AM/ FM button to change from AM to FM. The
operating mode will be displayed next to the station
frequency. The display will show ST when a stereo
station is received in the FM mode.
Every time a preset button is used a corresponding
button number will be displayed.
Mode Button
Balance
Press the MODE button to select between the cassette
tape player, CD changer, or the Satellite Radio (if
equipped). When the Satellite Radio (if equipped) is
selected “SA” will appear in your radio display.
4
The balance control adjusts the left-to-right speaker bal-
ance. Press the BAL button in and it will pop out. Adjust
the balance and push the button back in.
Fade
A CD or tape may remain in the player while in the
Satellite or radio mode.
The fade control provides for balance between the front
and rear speakers. Press the FADE button in and it will
pop out. Adjust the balance and push the button back in.
Cassette Player Features
With ignition OFF and the sound system OFF, you can
eject the tape cassette by pushing the EJECT button.
Bass and Treble Tone Control
The tone controls consist of 2 separate bands. The bass
band is on the left, and the treble band is on the right.
Each band is adjusted by a slider control with a detent at
the mid-position. Moving the control up or down in-
creases or decreases amplification of that band. The mid
position provides a balanced output.
You can turn the tape player ON by inserting a cassette or
activating the MODE button (with a cassette in the radio),
but only when the ignition and radio are on.
Each time a cassette is inserted the tape player will begin
playing on the side of the cassette that is facing up in the
player.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
122 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
Music Search
Time Button
Pressing the SEEK button while playing a tape will start
the Music Search mode. Press the SEEK button up for the
next selection on the tape and down to return to the
beginning of the current selection, or return to the
beginning of the previous selection if the tape is within
the first 5 seconds of the current selection.
Press the time button to toggle between station frequency
and time of day.
Pressing this button while playing a cassette tape will
change the side of the tape being played.
NR (Noise Reduction)
Pushing the Number 2 Pre-set button when a tape is
playing deactivates the Dolby Noise Reduction System*.
When Dolby is ON, the NR symbol appears on the
display. Each time a tape is inserted the Dolby will turn
ON.
The SEEK symbol appears on the display when Music
Search is in operation. Music Search shuts off automati-
cally when a selection has been located.
Selective Music Search
Press the SEEK button up or down to move the track
number to skip forward or backward 1 to 7 selections.
Press the SEEK button once to move 1 selection, twice to
move 2 selections, etc.
* “Dolby” noise reduction manufactured under license
from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Dolby
and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Labo-
ratories Licensing Corporation.
Fast Forward And Rewind Buttons
CD Changer Control Capability — If Equipped
This radio is compatible with a remote mounted CD
changer available through Mopar Accessories. The fol-
lowing instructions are for the radio controls that operate
this CD changer.
Pressing the TUNE button up or down momentarily
activates Fast Forward or Rewind and makes the direc-
tional arrows appear on the display.
To stop Fast Forward or Rewind, press the TUNE button
again.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 123
Mode Button
To activate the CD changer, press the MODE button until
CD information appears on the display.
Random can be cancelled by pressing the button a second
time or by ejecting the CD from the changer.
CD Diagnostic Indicators
Push-Button
When driving over a very rough road, the CD player may
skip momentarily. Skipping will not damage the disc or
the player, and play will resume automatically.
While the CD changer is playing, press the NUMBER 1
push-button or the NUMBER 5 push-button to select a
disc numbered higher or lower than the one currently
being played.
4
As a safeguard and to protect your CD player, one of the
following warning symbols may appear on your display.
Seek Button
A CD HOT symbol indicates the player is too hot.
Press the SEEK up or down to select another track on the
same disc. A SEEK symbol will appear on the display.
CD HOT will pause the operation. Play can be resumed
when the operating temperature is corrected or another
MODE is selected.
Fast Forward And Rewind Buttons
Press and hold the FF button for fast forward. Press and
hold the RW button for fast reverse.
An ERR symbol will appear on the display if the laser is
unable to read the Disc data for the following reasons:
The audio output can be heard when fast forward and
fast reverse are activated.
•
•
•
•
Excessive vibration
Random Play (RND)
Disc inserted upside down
Damaged disc
Press the Random button to play the tracks on the
selected disc in random order for an interesting change of
pace.
Water condensation on optics
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
124 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
Radio Display Messages
Your radio has been designed to display certain messages
when a problem is detected with the CD player.
SALES CODE RBQ—AM/FM STEREO RADIO
WITH 6 - DISC CD CHANGER
Radio Operation
Power/Volume Control
Press the PWR/ VOL control to turn the radio on. Turn
the volume control clockwise to increase the volume.
NOTE: Power to operate the radio is controlled by the
ignition switch. It must be in the ON or ACC position to
operate the radio.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 125
Mode
Tune
Press the MODE button repeatedly to select between AM,
FM, the CD changer and Sirius Satellite Radio™ (if
equipped). The display will show ST when a stereo
station is received.
Press the TUNE control up or down to increase or
decrease the frequency. If the button is pressed and held,
the radio will continue to tune until the button is
released. The frequency will be displayed and continu-
ously updated while the button is pressed.
To select Sirius Satellite Radio™ (if equipped), press the
MODE button until the word SIRIUS appears. The fol-
lowing will be displayed in this order: After three sec-
onds, the current channel name and number will be
displayed for five seconds. The current program type and
channel number will then be displayed for five seconds.
The current channel name and number will then be
displayed until an action occurs. CD’s may remain in the
player while in the Satellite Radio mode.
Balance — BAL
4
The Balance control adjusts the left-to-right speaker bal-
ance. Press the BAL button in and it will pop out. Adjust
the balance and push the button back in.
Fade
The Fade control provides for balance between the front
and rear speakers. Press the FADE button in and it will
pop out. Adjust the balance and push the button back in.
Seek
Tone Control
Press and release the SEEK button to search for the next
station in either the AM or FM mode. Press the top of the
button to seek up and the bottom to seek down. The
radio will remain tuned to the new station until you
make another selection. Holding the button in will by-
pass stations without stopping until you release it.
The tone controls affect the Bass and Treble frequency
bands. Each is controlled by a slider control with a detent
at the mid position. Moving a control up or down
increases or decreases amplification of the band. The mid
position provides a balanced output.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
126 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
To Set The Radio Push-Button Memory
General Information
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to push-button memory, press the SET RND
button. SET 1 will show in the display window. Select the
“1–6” button you wish to lock onto this station and press
and release that button. If a button is not selected within
5 seconds after pressing the SET RND button, the station
will continue to play but will not be locked into push-
button memory.
This radio complies with Part 15 of FCC rules and with
RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference,
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
You may add a second station to each push-button by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in
both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM and 12 FM
stations to be locked into push-button memory. The
stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by
pressing the corresponding push-button twice. Every
time a preset button is used, a corresponding button
number will be displayed.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressively ap-
proved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
CD Player Operation
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position and the Power / Volume control pushed ON
before the CD player will operate.
Time Button
Press the TIME button to change the display between
radio frequency and time.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 127
Inserting The Compact Disc
CAUTION!
LOAD/ EJT — Load
Press the LOAD/ EJT button and the button with the
corresponding number where the CD is being loaded.
After the radio displays “load” insert the CD into the
player.
3
This CD player will accept 4 ⁄4 inch (12 cm) discs
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
CD player mechanism.
Radio display will show “loading” when it is being
loaded.
4
LOAD / EJT — Eject
You may either insert or eject a disc with the radio OFF.
Press the LOAD/ EJT button and the button with the
corresponding number where the CD was loaded and the
disc will unload and move to the entrance for easy
removal.
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio
OFF, the display will show the time of day. If you insert
a disc with the ignition OFF, the display will show the
time of day for about 5 seconds, then go out.
Radio display will show “ejecting” when it is being
ejected.
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio
ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and
begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will
show the disc number, the track number, and index time
in minutes and seconds. Play will begin at the start of
track 1.
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
15 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
the radio will continue to play the non-removed CD. If
the CD is removed and there are other CD’s in the radio,
the radio will play the next CD. If the CD is removed and
there are no other CD’s in the radio, the radio will return
to the last selected AM or FM mode.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
128 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
The disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
Press TUNE FF to fast forward through the tracks. Press
the FF button a second time to stop the fast forward
feature. If TUNE RW is pressed, the current track will
reverse to the beginning of the track and begin playing.
Seek
Press the top of the SEEK button for the next selection on
the CD. Press the bottom of the button to return to the
beginning of the current selection, or return to the
beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the
first second of the current selection.
Press the SET / RND button a second time to stop
Random Play.
PTY (Program Type) Button
Scan
Pressing this button once will turn on the PTY mode for
5 seconds. If no action is taken during the 5 second time
out the PTY icon will turn off. Pressing the PTY button
within 5 seconds will allow the program format type to
be selected. Many radio stations do not currently broad-
cast PTY information.
Press the Scan button to scan through each track on the
CD currently playing.
FF/TUNE/RW
Press FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will begin to
fast forward until FF is released. The RW ( Reverse)
button works in a similar manner.
Toggle the PTY button to select the following format
types:
Random Play — SET / RND
Program Type
Adult Hits
Radio Display
Adlt Hit
Press the RND button while the CD is playing to activate
Random Play. This feature plays the tracks on the disc in
random order to provide an interesting change of pace.
Classical
Classic Rock
College
Classicl
Cls Rock
College
Country
Press the SEEK button to move to the next randomly
selected track.
Country
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 129
By pressing the SEEK button when the PTY icon is
displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency
station with the same selected PTY name. The PTY
function only operates when in the FM mode.
Program Type
Emergency
Emergency Test
Information
Jazz
Foreign Language
News
Nostalgia
Oldies
Personality
Public
Rhythm and Blues
Religious Music
Religious Talk
Rock
Radio Display
ALERT!
Test
Inform
Jazz
Language
News
Nostalga
Oldies
Persnlty
Public
R & B
Rel Musc
Rel Talk
Rock
The radio display will flash “SEEK” and the selected PTY
program type when searching for the next PTY station. If
no station is found with the selected PTY program type,
the radio will return to the last station.
4
If a preset button is activated while in the PTY (Program
Type) mode, the PTY mode will be exited and the radio
will tune to the preset station.
By pressing the SCAN button when the PTY icon is
displayed, the radio will stop at every PTY station on the
band and list each corresponding program type in the
radio display.
Soft
Soft
Soft Rock
Soft Rhythm and Blues
Sports
Soft Rck
Soft R&B
Sports
Talk
Time
Press the TIME button to change the display from
elapsed CD playing time to time of day.
Talk
Top 40
Weather
Top 40
Weather
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
130 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
REMOTE SOUND SYSTEM CONTROLS — IF
EQUIPPED
The button located in the center of the right hand control
will switch modes to Radio, Tape, or CD.
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear
surface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to
access the switches.
The left hand control is a rocker type switch with a push
button in the center. The function of the left hand control
is different depending on which mode you are in.
The following describes the left hand control operation in
each mode.
Radio Operation
Pressing the top of the switch will SEEK up for the next
listenable station and pressing the bottom of the switch
will SEEK down for the next listenable station.
The button located in the center of the left hand control
will tune to the next pre-set station that you have
programmed in the radio pre-set push-buttons.
The right hand control is a rocker type switch with a push
button in the center. Pressing the top of the switch will
increase the volume and pressing the bottom of the
switch will decrease the volume.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 131
Tape Player
CASSETTE TAPE AND PLAYER MAINTENANCE
To keep the cassette tapes and player in good condition,
take the following precautions:
Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next
selection on the cassette. Pressing the bottom of the
switch once will go to the beginning of the current
selection or to the beginning of the previous selection if it
is within the first 5 seconds of the current selection.
1. Do not use cassette tapes longer than C-90; otherwise,
sound quality and tape durability will be greatly dimin-
ished.
If you press the switch up or down twice it plays the
second selection, three times, it will play the third, etc.
4
2. Keep the cassette tape in its case to protect from
slackness and dust when it is not in use.
The button in the center of the left hand switch has no
function in this mode.
3. Keep the cassette tape away from direct sunlight, heat
and magnetic fields such as the radio speakers.
CD Player
4. Before inserting a tape, make sure that the label is
adhering flatly to the cassette.
Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next
track on the CD. Pressing the bottom of the switch once
will go to the beginning of the current track or to the
beginning of the previous track if it is within one second
after the current track begins to play.
5. A loose tape should be corrected before use. To rewind
a loose tape, insert the eraser end of a pencil into the tape
drive gear and twist the pencil in the required directions.
If you press the switch up or down twice it plays the
second track, three times, it will play the third, etc.
Maintain your cassette tape player. The head and capstan
shaft in the cassette player can pick up dirt or tape
deposits each time a cassette is played. The result of
deposits on the capstan shaft may cause the tape to wrap
around and become lodged in the tape transport. The
The button in the center of the left hand switch changes
CD’s on the 6–Disc in-dash CD changer radio (RBQ). This
button does not function for all other radios.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
132 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
other adverse condition is low or “muddy” sound from
one or both channels, as if the treble tone control were
turned all the way down. To prevent this, you should
periodically clean the head with a commercially available
WET cleaning cassette.
5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become
too high.
As preventive maintenance, clean the head about every
30 hours of use. If you wait until the head becomes very
dirty (noticeably poor sound), it may not be possible to
remove all deposits with a simple WET cleaning cassette.
NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particu-
lar disc, it may be damaged (i.e. scratched, reflective
coating removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc)
oversized, or have theft protection encoding. Try a
known good disc before considering disc player service.
COMPACT DISC MAINTENANCE
To keep the compact discs in good condition, take the
following precautions:
RADIO OPERATION AND CELLULAR PHONES
Under certain conditions, the cellular phone being On in
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
by relocating the cellular phone antenna. This condition
is not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance
does not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the
antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be
turned down or off during cellular phone operation.
1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the
surface.
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth,
wiping from center to edge.
3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratch-
ing the disc.
4. Do not use solvents such as benzine, thinner, cleaners,
or antistatic sprays.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 133
CLIMATE CONTROLS
Bi-Level
Outside air flows through the outlets located in the
instrument panel and at the floor.
Panel
Outside air flows through the outlets located in the
instrument panel.
4
Heat
Outside air flows primarily through the floor out-
lets located under the instrument panel.
Mix
Outside air flows in equal proportions through the
floor and defroster outlets.
The controls for the heating and ventilation system in this
vehicle consist of a series of rotary knobs. These comfort
controls can be set to obtain desired interior conditions.
Defrost
Outside air is primarily directed to the windshield
Heater Only
through the defroster outlets located at the base of
the windshield, and the demister outlets located at the
edge of each side of the instrument panel.
The mode control (located at the right of the control
panel) can be set in any of the following positions:
NOTE: To improve your selection choices, the system
allows you to operate at intermediate positions between
the major modes. These intermediate positions are iden-
tified by the small dots.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
134 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
Blower Control
Air Conditioning
The rotary knob at the left of the control panel is the
blower control. Turn the knob clockwise to one of the
four positions to obtain the blower speed you desire.
Temperature Control
The rotary knob at the center of the control panel controls
the temperature of the interior air. You can choose your
degree of comfort by rotating the knob. The coldest
temperature setting is to the extreme left (blue region)
and the warmest setting is to the extreme right (red
region) of the rotation.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 135
normal occurrence as the compressor will cycle on and
off to maintain comfort and increase fuel economy.
The mode control (at the right of the
control panel) can be set in any of the
following positions:
4
NOTE: To improve your selection choices, the system
allows you to operate at intermediate positions between
the major modes. These intermediate positions are iden-
tified by the small dots.
Air Conditioning Operation
To turn on the Air Conditioning, set the fan control at any
speed and press the snowflake button located at the right
of the control panel. Conditioned air will be directed
through the outlets selected by the mode control. A light
in the snowflake button shows that the air conditioning is
on. Press the button a second time to turn the air
conditioning off.
Recirculation Modes (Panel or Bi-Level )
Select the recirculation modes when
the outside air contains smoke, odors,
high humidity, or if rapid cooling is
desired. This feature allows for recir-
culation of interior air only. Air flows
through the panel outlets in this mode.
Slight changes in engine speed or power may be noticed
when the air conditioning compressor is on. This is a
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
136 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
Panel
Blower Control
Outside air flows through the outlets located in the
instrument panel.
The rotary knob on the left of
the control panel is the
blower control. Turn the knob
clockwise to one of the four
positions to obtain the blower
speed you desire.
Bi-Level
Outside air flows through the outlets located in the
instrument panel and at the floor.
Floor
Outside air flows primarily through the floor out-
lets located under the instrument panel.
Temperature Control
Mix
Outside air flows in equal proportions through the
floor and defroster outlets.
The rotary knob at the center
of the control panel controls
the temperature of the inte-
rior air. You can choose your
degree of comfort by rotating
the knob. The coldest tem-
perature setting is to the ex-
treme left (blue region) and
the warmest setting is to the
extreme right (red region) of
the rotation.
Defrost
Outside air is primarily directed to the windshield
through the defroster outlets located at the base of
the windshield, and the demister outlets located at the
edge of each side of the instrument panel.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 137
Circulation
on the air conditioning, and drive with the windows
open for the first few minutes. Once the hot air has been
expelled, close the windows and turn the mode selector
to the Recirculation Panel Mode or Recirculation Mode
Bi-level position. When a comfortable condition has been
reached, choose a mode position and adjust the tempera-
ture control knob and blower speed as necessary to
maintain comfort. For high humidity conditions it may
be necessary to remain in the Recirculation mode to
maintain comfort.
The cab is designed with features to promote outside air
circulation. There are grilles in the cab back panel. These
are air exhausters that provide the means for regular
exchange of cab air.
Side window demisters direct air flow specifically to the
window glass to help prevent interior fogging of the
glass. They are located in the extreme outside upper
edges of the instrument panel. The demisters also pro-
vide extra air ducts for circulation. They are in operation
whenever the Floor, Mix or Defrost modes are in use.
4
Window Fogging
Windows will fog on the inside when the humidity inside
the vehicle is high. This often occurs in mild or cool
temperatures when it’s rainy or humid. In most cases
turning on the Air-conditioning (pressing the snowflake
button) will clear the fog. Adjust the temperature control,
air direction and blower speed to maintain comfort.
NOTE: When you turn off the engine you may hear a
hissing sound from under the hood for a short period of
time. This is a normal condition that occurs if the air
conditioning system has been on. It is not an indication of
a problem with the air conditioning system.
Operating Tips
As the temperature gets colder it may be necessary to
direct air onto the windshield by using MIX Mode
position on the control. Adjust the temperature control
and blower speed to maintain comfort. High blower
Fast Cooldown
For a fast cooldown, turn the blower fan rotary knob to
the extreme right position, turn the mode control to the
panel fresh position, press the snowflake button to turn
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
138 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
speeds will reduce fogging. Interior fogging on the
windshield can be quickly removed by selecting the
defrost mode.
When using the air conditioner in extremely heavy traffic
in hot weather especially when towing a trailer, addi-
tional engine cooling may be required. If this situation is
encountered, operate the transmission in a lower gear.
When stopped in heavy traffic, it may be necessary to
shift into NEUTRAL and depress the accelerator slightly
for fast idle operation.
Regular cleaning of the inside of the windows with a
non-filming cleaning solution (vinegar and water works
very well) will help prevent contaminates (cigarette
smoke, perfumes, etc.) from sticking to the windows.
Contaminates increase the rate of window fogging.
Winter Operation
When operating the system during the winter months,
make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of ice, slush, snow, or other obstruc-
tions.
Summer Operation
Air conditioned vehicles must be protected with a high
quality antifreeze coolant during summer to provide
proper corrosion protection and to raise the boiling point
of the coolant for protection against overheating. A 50 %
concentration is recommended.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 139
Operation Tips Chart
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
140 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
REAR WINDOW DEFROSTER – Quad-Cab Only
CAUTION!
Use care when washing the inside of the rear win-
dow to prevent damage to heating elements. Use a
soft cloth and a mild washing solution, wiping
parallel to the heating elements. Also, keep all
objects a safe distance from the window to prevent
damaging the heating elements.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
Ⅵ Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
▫ Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
▫ Normal Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
▫ Engine Block Heater — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 146
Ⅵ Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
▫ Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Ⅵ Four-Wheel Drive Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
▫ NV244 Transfer Case Operating
Information / Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
▫ Shifting Procedure - NV244 Transfer Case . . . . 160
Ⅵ Limited-Slip Differential — If Equipped . . . . . 162
Ⅵ Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Ⅵ Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
▫ Rear Wheel Anti-Lock Brake System . . . . . . . . 164
5
▫ Four-Wheel Anti-Lock Brake System — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Ⅵ Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Ⅵ Rocking The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Ⅵ Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
▫ NV 233 Transfer Case Operating
Information/ Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
▫ Shifting Procedure - NV233 Transfer Case . . . . 155
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
142 STARTING AND OPERATING
▫ Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN) . . . . . . . . . . 171
▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Ⅵ Tires—General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
▫ Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
▫ Tire Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
▫ Radial-Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
▫ Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 178
▫ Tire Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
▫ Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
▫ Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
▫ Alignment And Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Ⅵ Supplemental Tire Pressure Information . . . . . 182
Ⅵ Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Ⅵ Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Ⅵ Tire Rotation Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Ⅵ Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
▫ Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
▫ Gasoline/ Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
▫ MMT In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
▫ Sulfur In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
▫ Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Ⅵ Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
▫ Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
▫ Fuel Tank Filler Tube . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
▫ Fuel System Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Ⅵ Catalytic Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Ⅵ Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
▫ Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
▫ Curb Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
▫ Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 143
Ⅵ Loading Wide Building Materials . . . . . . . . . . 194
Ⅵ Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
▫ Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
▫ Trailer And Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
▫ Trailer Towing—Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
▫ Cooling System Tips—Trailer Towing . . . . . . . 201
Ⅵ Snowplow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
▫ Dodge Dakota Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Ⅵ Recreational Towing (Behind Motorhome, Etc.)
Of 4X4 Vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
▫ Recreational Towing Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
▫ Returning To Normal Operation . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Ⅵ Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Ⅵ Equipment Identification Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
▫ Trailer Towing Information
(Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings) . . . . . . . . . 199
5
▫ Trailer Towing Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
▫ Trailer Tow Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
144 STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING PROCEDURES
WARNING!
The starter should not be operated for more than 15
second intervals. Waiting a few seconds between such
intervals will protect the starter from overheating.
Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic trans-
mission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel
could enter the catalytic converter and once the
engine has started, ignite and damage the converter
and vehicle. If the vehicle has a discharged battery,
booster cables may be used to obtain a start from a
booster battery or the battery in another vehicle. This
type of start can be dangerous if done improperly.
See section 6 of this manual for the proper jump
starting procedures and follow them carefully.
Manual Transmission
Apply the parking brake, place the gearshift control lever
in NEUTRAL and depress clutch pedal to the floor before
starting the vehicle. This vehicle is equipped with a
clutch interlocking ignition system. It will not start unless
the clutch is depressed.
Automatic Transmission
Start the engine with the shift lever in NEUTRAL or
PARK position. Apply the brake before shifting to any
driving range.
Normal Starting
Normal starting of either a warm or cold engine is
obtained without pumping or depressing the accelerator
pedal. Turn the key to the START position and release
when the engine starts. If the engine fails to start within
10 seconds, turn the key to the OFF position, wait 5
seconds, then repeat the starting procedure.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 145
If Engine Fails To Start
If the engine shows no sign of starting after two 15
second periods of cranking with the accelerator pedal
held to the floor, the Normal Starting procedure should
be repeated.
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
Normal Starting procedure, it may be flooded. Push the
accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it there
while cranking the engine. This should clear any excess
fuel in case the engine is flooded.
WARNING!
Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the
throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start
the vehicle. This could result in flash fire causing
serious personal injury.
CAUTION!
5
To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank the
engine for more than 15 seconds at a time. Wait 10 to
15 seconds before trying again.
After Starting
The idle speed is automatically controlled on fuel injected
engines and will decrease as the engine warms up.
If the engine has been flooded, it may start to run, but not
have enough power to continue running when the key is
released. If this occurs, continue cranking with the accel-
erator pedal pushed all the way to the floor. Release the
accelerator pedal and the key once the engine is running
smoothly.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
146 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
CAUTION!
Remember to disconnect the cord before driving.
Damage to the 110-115 volt electrical cord could
cause electrocution.
Long periods of engine idling can cause excessive
exhaust temperatures which can damage your ve-
hicle. Do not leave your vehicle unattended with the
engine running.
SHIFTING
Automatic Transmission
WARNING!
The gear shift lever is mounted on the right side of the
steering column. To engage a gear for driving, move the
shift lever from P-Park or N-Neutral to the desired gear
range (R-Reverse, D-Drive, 2–Second, or 1–First). To
move the shift lever, pull it toward you, then release it
when the desired gear range is reached. The Transmis-
sion Range Indicator (labeled “Gear Selector”) in the
instrument cluster shows the selected gear range. The
Indicator is illuminated for night driving.
Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build up may
cause serious injury or death.
Engine Block Heater — If Equipped
The engine block heater warms engine coolant and
permits quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord
to a standard 110-115 volt AC electrical outlet with a
grounded, three wire extension cord.
Brake/Transmission Interlock System
This system prevents you from moving the gear shift out
of Park and into any gear unless the brake pedal is
pressed. This system is active only while the ignition
The engine block heater cord is located at the right front
of the engine compartment for all engine applications.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 147
switch is in the ON position. Always depress the brake
pedal first, before moving the gear selector out of PARK.
WARNING!
Never use Park position on an automatic transmis-
sion as a substitute for the parking brake. Always
apply parking brake fully when parked to guard
against vehicle movement and possible injury or
damage.
Gear Ranges
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from Park or
Neutral position into another gear range.
“P” Park
This position supplements parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never use Park while the vehicle is in motion. Apply the
parking brake when leaving vehicle in this range. Always
apply the parking brake first, then place the selector in
the Park position.
5
WARNING!
It is dangerous to shift the selector lever out of “P” or
“N” if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re-
verse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when
the engine is idling normally and when your right
foot is firmly on the brake pedal.
WARNING!
Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if
it is not completely in P (Park). Check by trying to
move the gearshift lever back and forth without first
pulling the lever toward you, after you have set it in
P. Make sure it is in Park before leaving the vehicle.
“R” Reverse
Use this range only after the vehicle has come to a
complete stop.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
148 STARTING AND OPERATING
“N” Neutral
Overdrive
Shift to Neutral when vehicle is standing for prolonged
periods with engine running. Engine may be started in
this range. Set the parking brake if you must leave the
vehicle.
The transmission contains a fourth and fifth (if equipped)
speed (Overdrive) and will automatically shift from
Drive to Overdrive if the following conditions are
present:
“D” Drive
•
•
The transmission selector is in Drive.
Use this position for most city and highway driving.
Engine coolant has reached normal operating tem-
perature.
“2” Second
Use this position for driving slowly in heavy city traffic
or on mountain roads where more precise speed control
is desirable. Use it also when climbing long grades, and
for engine braking when descending moderately steep
grades. To prevent excessive engine speed do not exceed
45 mph (72 km/ h) in this range.
•
Vehicle speed is above approximately 30 mph (48
km/ h).
•
•
The “O/ D OFF” button has not been activated.
Transmission has reached normal operating tempera-
ture.
“1” First
Overdrive can be locked out by pressing the O/ D Off
button located at the end of the transmission gear shift
lever. A light in the instrument cluster shows that the
feature has been deactivated. Pressing the button a
second time restores the Overdrive function.
Use this position for driving up very steep hills and for
engine braking at low speeds 25 mph (40 km/ h ) or less
when going down hill. To prevent excessive engine speed
do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/ h) in this range.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 149
If the transmission temperature gets extremely hot, the
transmission will automatically select the most desir-
able gear for operation at this temperature. If the
transmission temperature becomes hot enough the
O/ D OFF and/ or TRANS TEMP light(s) may illumi-
nate and the transmission may downshift out of
Overdrive until the transmission cools down. After
cooldown, the transmission will resume normal op-
eration.
5
When To Lock Out Overdrive
When driving in hilly areas, towing a trailer, carrying a
heavy load, or whenever frequent transmission shifting
occurs, press the “O/ D OFF” button. This will improve
performance and reduce the potential for transmission
overheating or failure due to excessive shifting.
The “O/ D OFF” feature must be selected, if desired, each
time the engine is started.
NOTE: If the vehicle is started in extremely cold
temperatures, the transmission may not shift into Over-
drive and will automatically select the most desirable
gear for operation at this temperature. Normal operation
will resume when the transmission fluid temperature has
risen to a suitable level. Refer also to the Note under
torque converter clutch, later in this section.
Torque Converter Clutch
A feature designed to improve fuel economy is included
in all automatic transmissions. A clutch within the torque
converter engages automatically at a calibrated speed at
light throttle. It engages at higher speeds under heavier
acceleration. This may result in a slightly different feeling
or response during normal operation in high gear. When
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
150 STARTING AND OPERATING
the vehicle speed drops below a calibrated speed, or
during acceleration, the clutch automatically and
smoothly disengages. The feature is operational in Over-
drive and in Drive.
Manual Transmission
NOTE: The parking brake should be engaged before
leaving the vehicle, especially on an incline.
Use each gear in numerical order - do
not skip a gear. Be sure the transmission
is in FIRST gear— not THIRD, when
starting from a standing position; other-
wise damage to the clutch can result
from starting in THIRD.
NOTE: The torque converter clutch will not engage
until the transmission fluid and engine coolant are warm
[usually after 1-3 miles (1.6 - 4.8 km) of driving]. Because
the engine speed is higher when the torque converter
clutch is not engaged, it may seem as if the transmission
is not shifting into Overdrive when cold. This is normal.
Pressing the O/ D OFF button, when the transmission is
sufficiently warm, will demonstrate that the transmission
is able to shift into and out of overdrive.
For most city driving you will find it easier to use only
the lower gears. For steady highway driving with light
accelerations, 5th gear is recommended. To shift into 5th
gear, move the shift lever to the right beyond the spring
pressure point and push it forward. When shifting from
5th to 4th gear, pull the lever down toward you in one
motion. Do not pull the lever sharply left as you may
shift accidentally into 2nd gear and damage the trans-
mission or engine.
NOTE: If the vehicle has not been driven in several
days, the first few seconds of operation after shifting the
transmission into gear may seem sluggish. This is due to
the fluid partially draining from the torque converter into
the transmission. This condition is normal and will not
cause damage to the transmission. The torque converter
will refill within five seconds of shifting from Park into
any other gear position.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 151
To shift into Reverse, come to a complete stop. Depress
the clutch and pause briefly to allow the gear train to spin
down. Move the shift lever from the Neutral position
straight across and back into Reverse.
Downshifting
Moving from a high gear down to the lower gears in
descending numerical order is recommended to preserve
brakes when driving down steep hills. In addition,
downshifting at the right time provides better accelera-
tion when you want to resume speed. For acceleration
initiated at speeds less than 20 mph (30 km/ h), second
gear is recommended.
Never drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal.
Do not attempt to hold the vehicle on a hill with the
clutch pedal partially engaged, as this will cause abnor-
mal wear on the clutch.
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION
5
Recommended Shift Speeds
To use your manual transmission for fuel economy it
should be upshifted as listed below. Shift at the vehicle
speeds listed for acceleration and cruise conditions (rela-
tively steady speeds).
NV 233 Transfer Case Operating
Information/Precautions
The NV233 is an electric shift transfer case and is
operated by the 4WD Control Switch (Transfer Case
Switch), which is located on the instrument panel.
Recommended Manual Transmission Shift Speeds in
MPH (KM/ H)
The NV233 transfer case provides 4 mode positions: 2
(rear) wheel drive high range, 4 wheel drive high range,
4 wheel drive low range, and neutral.
Engine Model 1 to 2
2 to 3
3 to 4
4 to 5
3.7L/
4.7L
All
15 (24) 25 (40) 40 (64) 45 (72)
The NV233 transfer case is designed to be driven in the 2
wheel drive position (2WD) for normal street and high-
way conditions (dry hard surfaced roads).
Higher upshift speeds may be used to obtain a desired
acceleration rate.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
152 STARTING AND OPERATING
When additional traction is required, the transfer case
4HI and 4LO positions can be used to lock the front and
rear driveshafts together and force the front and rear
wheels to rotate at the same speed. This is accomplished
by rotating the 4WD Control Switch to the desired
position - see Shifting Procedure section for specific
shifting instructions. The 4HI and 4LO positions are
designed for loose, slippery road surfaces only. Driving
in the 4HI and 4LO positions on dry hard surfaced roads
may cause increased tire wear and damage to the driv-
eline components.
case selection. When you select a different transfer case
position, the indicator lights will do the following:
If All Shift Requirements are Met
1. The current position indicator light will turn OFF.
2. The selected position indicator light will flash until the
transfer case completes the shift.
3. When the shift is complete, the indicator light for the
selected position will stop flashing and remain ON.
If One or More Shift Requirements are not Met
The transfer case Neutral (N) position is selected by
depressing the recessed button located on the lower left
hand corner of the 4WD Control Switch.
1. The indicator light for the current position will remain
ON.
2. The newly selected position indicator light will flash.
NOTE: The transfer case Neutral (N) position is to be
used for recreational towing only. See Recreational Tow-
ing section for specific procedures on shifting into and
out of Neutral (N).
3. The transfer case will not shift.
NOTE: Before retrying a selection, make certain that all
the necessary requirements for selecting a new transfer
case position have been met. To retry the selection, turn
the control knob back to the current position, wait five (5)
Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights
Transfer case position indicator lights are located on the
Four-Wheel-Drive Control Switch, found on your instru-
ment panel, and indicate the current and desired transfer
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 153
seconds, and retry selection. To find the shift require-
ments, refer to the ЉShifting ProcedureЉ for your transfer
case, located in this section of the owner’s manual.
NOTE: Do not attempt to make a shift while only the
front or rear wheels are spinning. The NV233 transfer
case is not equipped with a synchronizer and therefore
the front and rear driveshaft speeds must be equal for the
shift to take place. Shifting while only the front or rear
wheels are spinning can cause damage to the transfer
case.
The “SERVICE 4WD” warning light monitors the electric
shift 4WD system. If this light remains on after engine
start up or illuminates during driving, it means that the
4WD system is not functioning properly and that service
is required.
When operating your vehicle in 4LO, the engine speed is
approximately three times that of the 2WD or 4HI
positions at a given road speed. Take care not to over-
speed the engine and do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/ h).
5
WARNING!
Always engage the parking brake when powering
down the vehicle if the ؆Service 4WD؆ light is
illuminated. Not engaging the parking brake may
allow the vehicle to roll which may cause personal
injury.
Proper operation of 4 wheel drive vehicles depends on
tires of equal size, type and circumference on each wheel.
Any difference in tire size can cause damage to the
transfer case.
Because 4 wheel drive provides improved traction, there
is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping speeds.
Do not go faster than road conditions permit.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
154 STARTING AND OPERATING
4HI
WARNING!
4 Wheel Drive High Range - Locks the front and rear
driveshafts together. Forces the front and rear wheels to
rotate at the same speed. Additional traction for loose,
slippery road surfaces only.
You or others could be injured if you leave the
vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the
Neutral (N) position without first fully engaging the
parking brake. The transfer case Neutral (N) position
disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from
the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to move
regardless of the transmission position. The parking
brake should always be applied when the driver is
not in the vehicle.
4LO
4 Wheel Drive Low Range - Low speed 4 wheel drive.
Locks the front and rear driveshafts together. Forces the
front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed.
Additional traction and maximum pulling power for
loose, slippery road surfaces only. Do not exceed 25 mph
(40 km/ h).
For additional information on the appropriate use of each
transfer case mode position see the information below:
N
Neutral - Disengages both the front and rear driveshafts
from the powertrain. To be used for flat towing behind
another vehicle. See Recreational Towing for more infor-
mation.
2WD
Rear Wheel Drive High Range - Normal street and
highway driving. Dry hard surfaced roads.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 155
Shifting Procedure - NV233 Transfer Case
2WD to 4HI or 4HI to 2WD
Rotate the 4WD Control Switch to the desired position.
Shifts between 2WD and 4HI can be done with the
vehicle stopped or in motion. With the vehicle in motion,
the transfer case will engage / disengage faster if you
momentarily release the accelerator pedal after turning
the control switch. If the vehicle is stopped, the ignition
key must be in the ON position with the engine either
RUNNING or OFF. This shift cannot be completed if the
key is in the accessory position.
5
NOTE: On vehicles equipped with Anti-Lock Brake
Systems, the 4x4 system will not allow shifts between
2WD/ 4HI if the rear wheels are spinning (no traction). In
this situation the selected position indicator light will
flash and the original position indicator light will remain
ON. At this time, reduce speed and stop spinning the
wheels to complete the shift. There may be a delay up to
10 seconds for the shift to complete after the wheels have
stopped spinning.
NOTE: If any of the requirements to select a new
transfer case position have not been met, the transfer case
will not shift.The indicator light for the previous position
will remain ON and the newly selected position indicator
light will continue to flash until all the requirements for
the selected position have been met. To retry a shift:
return the control knob back to the original position,
make certain all shift requirements have been met, wait
five (5) seconds and try the shift again.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
156 STARTING AND OPERATING
4HI to 4LO or 4LO to 4HI
Alternate Procedure
NOTE: When shifting into or out of 4LO some gear
noise may be heard. This noise is normal and is not
detrimental to the vehicle or occupants.
1. Bring the vehicle to complete stop.
2. With the key ON and the engine either OFF or
RUNNING, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL (de-
press clutch on manual transmissions).
Shifting can be performed with the vehicle rolling 2-3
mph (3-5 km/ h) or completely stopped. USE EITHER OF
THE FOLLOWING PROCEDURES:
3. Rotate the transfer case control switch to the desired
position.
Preferred Procedure
4. After the desired position indicator light is ON (not
flashing), shift transmission back into gear (release clutch
on manual transmissions).
1. With engine RUNNING, slow vehicle to 2-3 mph (3-5
km/ h).
2. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL (depress clutch
on manual transmissions).
NOTE: If steps 1 or 2 of either the Preferred or Alternate
Procedure are not satisfied prior to attempting the shift or
if they no longer are being met while the shift attempt is
in process then the desired position indicator light will
flash continuously while the original position indicator
light is ON, until all requirements have been met.
3. While still rolling, rotate the transfer case control
switch to the desired position.
4. After the desired position indicator light is ON (not
flashing), shift transmission back into gear (release clutch
on manual transmissions).
NOTE: The ignition key must be ON for a shift to take
place and for the position indicator lights to be operable.
If the key is not ON then the shift will not take place and
no position indicator lights will be on or flashing.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 157
NV244 Transfer Case Operating Information /
Precautions
The NV244 is an electric shift transfer case and is
operated by the 4WD Control Switch, which is located on
the instrument panel.
When additional traction is required, the 4HI and 4LO
positions can be used to lock the front and rear drive-
shafts together through the transfer case inter-axle differ-
ential and force the front and rear wheels to rotate at the
same speed. This is accomplished by rotating the 4WD
Control Switch to these positions. The 4HI and 4LO
positions are intended for loose, slippery road surfaces
only. Driving in the 4HI and 4LO positions on dry hard
surfaced roads may cause increased tire wear and dam-
age to the driveline components.
The NV244 transfer case provides 4 mode positions -
Normal all wheel drive high range, 4 wheel drive high
range, 4 wheel drive low range, and neutral.
5
This transfer case is equipped with an inter-axle differ-
ential that allows driving the vehicle in the normal all
wheel drive position (AWD) at all times on any given
road surface, including dry hard surfaced roads. The
AWD mode allows the front and rear wheels to rotate at
different speeds. This eliminates driveline binding and
component wear normally associated with driving the
vehicle in the 4HI position on dry hard surfaced roads.
This feature provides the safety, security, and conve-
nience of operating in all wheel drive at all times
regardless of road conditions.
The transfer case Neutral (N) position is selected by
depressing the recessed button located on the lower left
hand corner of the 4WD Control Switch.
NOTE: The transfer case Neutral (N) position is to be
used for recreational towing only. (See Recreational Tow-
ing section for specific procedures on shifting into and
out of Neutral (N).
Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights
Transfer case position indicator lights are located on the
Four-Wheel-Drive Control Switch, found on your instru-
ment panel, and indicate the current and desired transfer
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
158 STARTING AND OPERATING
case selection. When you select a different transfer case
position, the indicator lights will do the following:
seconds, and retry selection. To find the shift require-
ments, refer to the ЉShifting ProcedureЉ for your transfer
case, located in this section of the owner’s manual.
If All Shift Requirements are Met
The SERVICE 4WD warning light monitors the electric
shift 4WD system. If this light remains on after engine
start up or illuminates during driving, it means that the
4WD system is not functioning properly and that service
is required.
1. The current position indicator light will turn OFF.
2. The selected position indicator light will flash until the
transfer case completes the shift.
3. When the shift is complete, the indicator light for the
selected position will stop flashing and remain ON.
WARNING!
If One or More Shift Requirements are not Met
Always engage the parking brake when powering
down the vehicle if the ؆Service 4WD؆ light is
illuminated. Not engaging the parking brake may
allow the vehicle to roll which may cause personal
injury.
1. The indicator light for the current position will remain
ON.
2. The newly selected position indicator light will flash.
3. The transfer case will not shift.
NOTE: Before retrying a selection, make certain that all
the necessary requirements for selecting a new transfer
case position have been met. To retry the selection, turn
the control knob back to the current position, wait five (5)
NOTE: Do not attempt to make a shift while only the
front or rear wheels are spinning. The NV244 transfer
case is not equipped with a synchronizer and therefore
the front and rear driveshaft speeds must be equal for the
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 159
shift to take place. Shifting while only the front or rear
wheels are spinning can cause damage to the transfer
case.
WARNING!
You or others could be injured if you leave the
vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the
Neutral (N) position without first fully engaging the
parking brake. The transfer case Neutral (N) position
disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from
the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to move
regardless of the transmission position. The parking
brake should always be applied when the driver is
not in the vehicle.
When operating your vehicle in 4LO, the engine speed is
approximately three times that of the AWD or 4HI
positions at a given road speed. Take care not to over-
speed the engine and do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/ h).
Proper operation of 4 wheel drive vehicles depends on
tires of equal size, type and circumference on each wheel.
Any difference in tire size can cause damage to the
transfer case.
5
Because 4 wheel drive provides improved traction, there
is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping speeds.
Do not go faster than road conditions permit.
For additional information on the appropriate use of each
transfer case mode position see the information below:
AWD
Normal All Wheel Drive High Range - Employs inter-
axle differential. Allows front and rear wheels to rotate at
different speeds. All road surfaces.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
160 STARTING AND OPERATING
4HI
Shifting Procedure - NV244 Transfer Case
4 Wheel Drive High Range - Locks the transfer case
inter-axle differential. Forces front and rear wheels to
rotate at the same speed. Additional traction for loose,
slippery road surfaces only.
4LO
4 Wheel Drive Low Range - Low speed 4 wheel drive.
Locks the transfer case inter-axle differential. Forces the
front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed.
Additional traction and maximum pulling power for
loose, slippery road surfaces only. Do not exceed 25 mph
(40 km/ h).
N
NOTE: If any of the requirements to select a new
transfer case position have not been met, the transfer case
will not shift.The indicator light for the previous position
will remain ON and the newly selected position indicator
light will continue to flash until all the requirements for
the selected position have been met. To retry a shift:
return the control knob back to the original position,
make certain all shift requirements have been met, wait
five (5) seconds and try the shift again.
Neutral - Disengages both the front and rear driveshafts
from the powertrain. To be used for flat towing behind
another vehicle. See Recreational Towing for more infor-
mation.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 161
AWD to 4HI or 4HI to AWD
4HI to 4LO or 4LO to 4HI
Rotate the 4WD Control Switch to the desired position.
Shifts between AWD and 4HI can be done with the
vehicle stopped or in motion. With the vehicle in motion,
the transfer case will engage / disengage faster if you
momentarily release the accelerator pedal after turning
the control switch. If the vehicle is stopped the ignition
key must be in the ON position with the engine either
RUNNING or OFF. This shift cannot be completed if the
key is in the accessory position.
NOTE: When shifting into or out of 4LO some gear
noise may be heard. This noise is normal and is not
detrimental to the vehicle or occupants.
Shifting can be performed with the vehicle rolling 2-3
mph (3-5 km/ h) or completely stopped. USE EITHER OF
THE FOLLOWING PROCEDURES:
Preferred Procedure
5
1. With engine RUNNING, slow vehicle to 2-3 mph (3-5
km/ h).
NOTE: On vehicles equipped with a Anti-Lock Brake
Systems, the 4x4 system will not allow shifts between
AWD/ 4HI if the rear wheels are spinning (no traction).
In this situation the selected position indicator light will
flash and the original position indicator light will remain
ON. At this time, reduce speed and stop spinning the
wheels to complete the shift. There may be a delay up to
10 seconds for the shift to complete after the wheels have
stopped spinning.
2. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL (depress clutch
on manual transmissions).
3. Ensure ignition key is in the ON position with the
engine either RUNNING or OFF. While still rolling,
rotate the transfer case control switch to the desired
position.
4. After the desired position indicator light is ON (not
flashing), shift transmission back into gear (release clutch
on manual transmissions).
NOTE: Delayed shifting out of the 4HI position may be
experienced due to uneven tire wear, low tire pressure, or
excessive loading.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
162 STARTING AND OPERATING
Alternate Procedure
LIMITED-SLIP DIFFERENTIAL — IF EQUIPPED
The limited-slip differential provides additional traction
on snow, ice, mud, sand and gravel. It improves traction
when there is a difference between the characteristics of
the surface under the right and left rear wheels. During
normal driving and cornering, the limited-slip unit is
similar to a conventional differential. But on a slippery
surface, the differential delivers more of the driving effort
to the wheel having the better traction.
1. Bring the vehicle to complete stop.
2. With the key ON and the engine either OFF or
RUNNING, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL (de-
press clutch on manual transmissions).
3. Rotate the transfer case control switch to the desired
position.
4. After the desired position indicator light is ON (not
flashing), shift transmission back into gear (release clutch
on manual transmissions).
WARNING!
On vehicles equipped with a limited-slip differen-
tial, never run the engine with one rear wheel off the
ground. The vehicle may drive through the rear
wheel remaining on the ground and cause you to
lose control of the vehicle.
NOTE: If steps 1 or 2 of either the Preferred or Alternate
Procedure are not satisfied prior to attempting the shift or
if they no longer are being met while the shift attempt is
in process, then the desired position indicator light will
flash continuously while the original position indicator
light is ON, until all requirements have been met.
Care should be taken to avoid sudden accelerations when
both rear wheels are on a slippery surface. This could
cause both rear wheels to spin, and allow the vehicle to
slide sideways on the crowned surface of a road or in a
turn.
NOTE: The ignition key must be ON for a shift to take
place and for the position indicator lights to be operable.
If the key is not ON then the shift will not take place and
no position indicator lights will be on or flashing.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 163
PARKING BRAKE
The parking brake should be applied whenever the
driver is not in the vehicle.
NOTE: The BRAKE light in the instrument cluster
indicates only that the parking brake is applied—it does
not indicate the degree of application.
The foot operated parking brake is positioned below the
lower left corner of the instrument panel.
To release the parking brake: Pull the parking brake
release handle towards you. The BRAKE light in the
instrument cluster will go out when the parking brake is
disengaged.
To park on a hill: You must make sure that the parking
brake is fully applied and the gear shift lever is in PARK
(for an automatic transmission) or in REVERSE or FIRST
(for a manual transmission). You should apply the park-
ing brake before shifting to PARK; otherwise, the load on
the transmission locking mechanism may make it diffi-
cult to move the shift lever out of the Park position.
5
When parking on a hill, turn the front wheels:
•
•
Toward the curb on a downhill grade.
Away from the curb on an uphill grade.
To apply the parking brake: Place your foot on the
parking brake pedal and push firmly downward as far as
the pedal will go. When the parking brake is applied and
the ignition is ON, the BRAKE light in the instrument
cluster will light.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
164 STARTING AND OPERATING
BRAKE SYSTEM
WARNING!
In the event power assist is lost for any reason (for
example, repeated brake applications with the engine
off), the brakes will still function. The effort required to
brake the vehicle will be significantly increased over that
required with the power system operating.
•
Always fully apply the parking brake when leav-
ing your vehicle, or vehicle may roll and cause
damage or injury. Also be certain to leave an
automatic transmission in Park, a manual trans-
mission in Reverse or first gear. Failure to do so
may cause the vehicle to roll and cause damage or
injury.
If either the front or rear hydraulic system loses normal
capability, the remaining system will still function with
some loss of braking effectiveness. This will be evident by
increased pedal travel during application, greater pedal
force required to slow or stop, and activation of the Brake
Warning light and the ABS light during brake use.
•
•
Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving. Failure to do so can lead to brake
failure and an accident.
Leaving children in a vehicle unattended is dan-
gerous for a number of reasons. A child or others
could be injured. Children should be warned not
to touch the parking brake or the gear selector
lever. Don’t leave the key in the ignition. A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
Rear Wheel Anti-Lock Brake System
This Anti-Lock Brake System provides increased vehicle
stability and brake performance under most braking
conditions. The system automatically controls the opera-
tion of the rear brakes to prevent rear wheel lockup.
The system remains operational in the four-wheel drive
mode. The level of performance is reduced when the
front brakes are locked up. This will cause the rear brakes
to lock-up through the drivetrain, which may reduce the
effectiveness of the anti-lock system.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 165
During severe braking conditions, particularly with
changing road surfaces, such as ice to concrete, a slight
drop or minor pulsation may be felt in the brake pedal.
The system’s pump motor runs during an ABS stop to
provide regulated hydraulic pressure. The pump motor
makes a low humming noise during operation, which is
normal.
WARNING!
The Anti-Lock Brake System includes an amber ABS
warning light. When the light is illuminated, the Anti-
Lock Brake System is not functioning. The system reverts
to standard non-anti-lock brakes. Turning the ignition
OFF and ON again may reset the Anti-Lock Brake System
if the fault detected was only momentary.
Both Anti-Lock Brake Systems contain sophisticated
electronic equipment. It may be susceptible to inter-
ference caused by improperly installed or high out-
put radio transmitting equipment. This interference
can cause possible loss of anti-lock braking capabil-
ity. Installation of such equipment should be done
by qualified professionals.
5
WARNING!
Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish
their effectiveness and may lead to an accident.
Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just
press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to
slow down or stop.
Four-Wheel Anti-Lock Brake System — If
Equipped
This Anti-Lock Brake System is designed to aid the driver
in maintaining vehicle control under adverse braking
conditions. The system operates with a separate com-
puter to modulate hydraulic pressure to prevent wheel
lock-up and help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
166 STARTING AND OPERATING
When you are in a severe braking condition involving
use of the Anti-lock Brake System, you will experience
some pedal drop as the vehicle comes to a stop. This is
the result of the system reverting to the base brake
system.
WARNING!
•
•
•
Anti-lock system (ABS) cannot prevent the natu-
ral laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor
can it increase braking or steering efficiency be-
yond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle
brakes and tires or the traction afforded.
Engagement of the Anti-lock Brake System may be
accompanied by a pulsing sensation. You may also hear a
clicking noise. These occurrences are normal, and indi-
cate that the system is functioning properly.
The ABS cannot prevent accidents, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns,
following another vehicle too closely, or hydro-
planing. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver
can prevent accidents.
POWER STEERING
Your power steering system will provide mechanical
steering capability if power assist is lost.
The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety
or the safety of others.
If for any reason the hydraulic pressure is interrupted, it
will still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these
conditions you will experience an increase in steering
effort and a noticeable amount of “free play” in the
steering wheel.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 167
ROCKING THE VEHICLE
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
Tire Markings
If vehicle becomes stuck in snow, sand, or mud, it can
often be moved by a rocking motion. Move the gear
selector rhythmically between FIRST and REVERSE,
while applying slight pressure to the accelerator.
The least amount of accelerator pedal pressure to main-
tain the rocking motion without spinning the wheels or
racing the engine is most effective. Allow the engine to
idle with the transmission selector in NEUTRAL for at
least one minute after every five rocking-motion cycles.
This will minimize overheating and reduce the risk of
transmission failure during prolonged efforts to free a
stuck vehicle.
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
168 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
•
•
Temporary Spare tires are high pressure compact
spares designed for temporary emergency use only.
Tires designed to this standard have the letter “T”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa-
tion. Example: T145/ 80D18 103M.
•
P(Passenger)-Metric tire sizing is based on U.S. design
standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P” molded
into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Ex-
ample: P215/ 65R15 95H.
•
European Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with
the section width. The letter ЉPЉ is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/ 65R15 96H
High Flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design
standards and begins with the tire diameter molded
into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
•
LT(Light Truck)-Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preced-
ing the size designation. Example: LT235/ 85R16.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 169
Tire Sizing Chart
Size Designation:
EXAMPLE:
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards
؆....blank....؆ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards
LT = Light Truck tire based on U.S. design standards
T = Temporary Spare tire
31 = Overall Diameter in Inches (in)
5
215 = Section Width in Milimeters (mm)
65 = Aspect Ratio in Percent (%)
—Ratio of section height to section width of tire.
10.5 = Section Width in Inches (in)
R = Construction Code
—ЉRЉ means Radial Construction.
—ЉDЉ means Diagonal or Bias Construction.
15 = Rim Diameter in Inches (in)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
170 STARTING AND OPERATING
EXAMPLE:
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
—A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry.
H = Speed Symbol
—A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding
to its load index under certain operating conditions.
—The maximum speed corresponding to the Speed Symbol should only be achieved un-
der specified operating conditions. (ie. tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions and
posted speed limits).
Load Identification:
؆....blank....؆ = Absence of any text on sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) Tire
Extra Load (XL) = Extra Load (or Reinforced) Tire
Light Load = Light Load Tire
C,D,E = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load — Maximum Load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry.
Maximum Pressure — Maximum Pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this
tire.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 171
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall
tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on
the outboard side then you will find it on the inboard side
of the tire.
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire
however the date code may only be on one side. Tires
with white sidewalls will have the full TIN including
date code located on the white sidewall side of the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
—This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire
safety standards, and is approved for highway use.
5
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location.(2 digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size.(2 digits)
ABCD = Code used by tire manufacturer.(1 to 4 digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured.(2 digits)
—03 means the 3rd week.
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured.(2 digits)
—01 means the year 2001.
—Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have 1 number to represent the year in
which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
172 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Loading and Tire Pressure
Tire Placard Location
Tire and Loading Information Placard
NOTE: Some vehicles have a “Tire and Loading Infor-
mation” placard located on the driver’s side “B” pillar.
This placard tells you important information about the,
1) number of people that can be carried in the vehicle
2) the total weight your vehicle can carry
3) the tire size designed for your vehicle
4) the cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear
and spare tires.
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You
will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 173
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size and cold tire
inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading
Information placard and the Vehicle Loading section of
this manual.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas-
sengers from XXX kilograms or XXX pounds.
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo
and luggage load capacity. For example, if “XXX” amount
equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb. passengers in
your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage
load capacity is 650 lb. (1400–750 (5 x 150) = 650 lb.)
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
gross axle weight ratings (GAWR’s) for the front and rear
axles must not be exceeded. For further information on
GAWR’s, vehicle loading and trailer towing, see the
Vehicle Loading section of this manual.
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo
being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity
calculated in step 4.
5
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX
lbs.” on the Tire and Loading Information placard. The
combined weight of occupants, cargo/ luggage and
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
the weight referenced here.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this
manual to determine how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
NOTE: The following table shows examples on how to
calculate total load, cargo/ luggage and towing capacities
of your vehicle with varying seating configurations and
number and size of occupants. This table is for illustra-
tion purposes only and may not be accurate for the
seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occu-
pants and cargo should never exceed XXX pounds” on
your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
174 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: For the following example the combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs. (392 Kg).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 175
1. Safety—
WARNING!
Overloading of your tire is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
overload them.
WARNING!
Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause accidents.
• Under inflation increases tire flexing and can
result in tire failure.
• Over inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuck holes can cause
damage that results in tire failure.
TIRES—GENERAL INFORMATION
5
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primary
areas are affected by improper tire pressure:
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob-
lems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
• Over inflated or under inflated tires can affect
vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in
loss of vehicle control.
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle
to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right
or left.
Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom-
mended cold tire inflation pressure.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
176 STARTING AND OPERATING
2. Economy—
Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear
patterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal
wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for
earlier tire replacement. Underinflation also increases tire
rolling resistance and results in higher fuel consumption.
3. Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability—
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Overinflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure for passenger cars
is listed on either the face of the driver’s door or the
driver’s side “B” pillar. For vehicles other than passenger
cars, the cold tire inflation pressures are listed on either
the “B” pillar, the Certification Label or in the Tire
Inflation Pressures brochure in the glove compartment.
“B” PILLAR
The pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as
inspecting for signs of tire wear or visible damage at least
once a month. Use a good quality pocket-type gauge to
check tire pressure. Do not make a visual judgement
when determining proper inflation. Radial tires may look
properly inflated even when they are underinflated.
Some vehicles may have Supplemental Tire Pressure
Information for vehicle loads that are less that the maxi-
mum loaded vehicle condition. These pressure condi-
tions will be found in the “Supplemental Tire Pressure
Information” section of this manual.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 177
Example: If garage temperature = 68° F (20° C) and the
outside temperature = 32° F (0° C) then the cold tire
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12° F (7° C) for this
outside temperature condition.
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure al-
ways reinstall the valve stem cap–if equipped. This
will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the
valve stem, which could damage the valve stem.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
“cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not
been driven for at least 3 hours, or driven less than 1mile
(1 km) after a 3 hour period. The cold tire inflation
pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pres-
sure molded into the tire side wall.
5
Tire Pressures for High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or condi-
tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle
loading may be required for high speed vehicle opera-
tion. Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire
dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading
and cold tire inflation pressures.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with
temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12° F (7° C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage especially in
the winter.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
178 STARTING AND OPERATING
Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in
the tread area because of sidewall flexing. Consult your
authorized tire dealer for radial tire repairs.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maxi-
mum load is dangerous. The added strain on your
tires could cause them to fail. You could have a
serious accident. Don’t drive a vehicle loaded to the
maximum capacity at continuous speeds above 75
mph (120 km/h).
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use with
radial tires. It is engineered to be used on your style
vehicle only. Since this tire has limited tread life, the
original tire should be repaired (or replaced) and rein-
stalled at the first opportunity.
Radial-Ply Tires
WARNING!
WARNING!
Temporary use spare tires are for emergency use
only. With these tires, do not drive more than 50 mph
(80 km/h). Temporary-use spare tires have a total
tread life of 3,000 miles (4 800 km). Be sure to follow
the warnings which apply to your spare. Failure to
do so could result in spare tire failure and loss of
vehicle control.
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires
on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
poorly. The instability could cause an accident. Al-
ways use radial ply tires in sets of four (or 6, in case
of trucks with dual rear wheels). Never combine
them with other types of tires.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 179
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
spin your vehicle’s wheels above 35 mph (55 km/ h).
Do not install more than one compact spare tire/ wheel
on the vehicle at any given time.
See the paragraph on Freeing A Stuck Vehicle in Section
6 of this manual.
WARNING!
CAUTION!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-
ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam-
age or failure. A tire could explode and injure
someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster
than 35 mph (55 km/h) when you are stuck. And
don’t let anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter
what the speed.
5
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with the
compact spare installed. Damage to the vehicle may
result.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
180 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tread Wear Indicators
Replacement Tires
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires
to help you in determining when your tires should be
replaced.
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure. The manu-
facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva-
lent to the originals in size, quality and performance
when replacement is needed (see the paragraph on tread
wear indicators). Refer to the Tire and Loading Informa-
tion placard for the size designation of your tire. The
service description and load identification will be found
on the original equipment tire. Failure to use equivalent
replacement tires may adversely affect the safety, han-
dling, and ride of your vehicle. We recommend that you
contact your original equipment or an authorized tire
dealer with any questions you may have on tire specifi-
cations or capability.
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
grooves and will appear as bands when the tread depth
becomes 1/ 16 inch (2 mm). When the indicators appear
in 2 or more adjacent grooves, the tire should be replaced.
Many states have laws requiring tire replacement at this
point.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 181
WARNING!
CAUTION!
•
Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than
that specified for your vehicle. Some combina-
tions of unapproved tires and wheels may change
suspension dimensions and performance charac-
teristics, resulting in changes to steering, han-
dling, and braking of your vehicle. This can cause
unpredictable handling and stress to steering and
suspension components. You could lose control
and have an accident resulting in serious injury or
death. Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load
ratings approved for your vehicle.
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer read-
ings.
Alignment And Balance
Poor suspension alignment may result in:
5
•
•
Fast tire wear.
Uneven tire wear, such as feathering and one-sided
wear.
•
Vehicle pull to right or left.
•
•
Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally equipped
on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load
index could result in tire overloading and failure.
You could lose control and have an accident.
Tires may also cause the vehicle to pull to the left or right.
Alignment will not correct this condition. See your dealer
for proper diagnosis.
Improper alignment will not cause vehicle vibration.
Vibration may be a result of tire and wheel out-of-
balance. Proper balancing will reduce vibration and
avoid tire cupping and spotty wear.
Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden
tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
182 STARTING AND OPERATING
SUPPLEMENTAL TIRE PRESSURE INFORMATION
A light load vehicle condition is defined as two passen-
gers {150 lbs (68 kg) each} plus 200 lbs (91kg) of cargo.
Cold tire inflation pressures for a lightly loaded vehicle
will be found on a “Supplemental Tire Pressure Inflation”
label located on the face of the driver’s door or in the Tire
Information Pressures pamphlet in the glove box.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle, tires or chains observe the following
precautions:
•
Because of restricted chain clearance between tires and other suspen-
sion components, it is important that only chains in good condition
are used. Broken chains can cause serious damage. Stop the vehicle
immediately if noise occurs that could indicate chain breakage.
Remove the damaged parts of the chain before further use.
Install chains as tightly as possible and then retighten after driving
about 1/2 mile (0.8 km).
Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large bumps, especially
with a loaded vehicle.
Install only Class S chains on 4x2 and 4x4 vehicles.
Do not install tire chains on the front wheels of 4x2 vehicles.
Do not install tire chains or traction devices on rear wheels of 4x2
vehicles with tires larger than LT225/75R16. These tires are too large
for sufficient body clearance with chains or other traction devices.
•
•
•
•
•
•
TIRE CHAINS
Use only Class S chains, or other traction aids that meet
SAE specifications. Chains must be the proper size for the
vehicle as recommended by the chain manufacturer.
These cautions apply to all chain traction devices, includ-
ing link and cable (radial) chains.
•
Do not install tire chains or traction devices on front wheels of 4x4
models with tires larger than LT225/75R16. Do not install tire chains
or traction devices on rear wheels of 4x4 models with tires larger than
LT225/75R16. These tires are too large for sufficient body clearance
with chains or other traction devices.
•
•
Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pavement.
Tire chains are not allowed on 4x2 vehicles equipped with P255/65R16
or P255/55R17 tires or 4x4 vehicles equipped with P265/70R16 tires.
•
Observe the tire chain manufacturer’s instructions on method of
installation, operating speed, and conditions for usage. Always use
the lower suggested operating speed if both the chain manufacturer
and the vehicle manufacturer suggest a maximum speed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 183
SNOW TIRES
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
Snow tires should be of the same size and type construc-
tion as the front tires. Consult the manufacturer of the
snow tire to determine any maximum vehicle speed
requirement associated with the tire. These tires should
always be operated at the vehicle maximum capacity
inflation pressures under any load condition.
Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at
different loads and perform different steering, driving,
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
unequal rates and tend to develop irregular wear pat-
terns. These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of
tires. The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile
with aggressive tread designs such as those on all season
type tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to main-
tain mud, snow and wet traction levels, and contribute to
a smooth, quiet ride.
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid
and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be
poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states pro-
hibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be
checked before using these tire types.
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
184 STARTING AND OPERATING
Follow the recommended tire rotation frequency for your
type of driving found in the “Maintenance Schedules”
Section of this manual. More frequent rotation is permis-
sible if desired. The reasons for any rapid or unusual
wear should be corrected prior to rotation being per-
formed.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard
starting, stalling and hesitations. If you experience these
symptoms, try another brand of “regular” gasoline be-
fore considering service for the vehicle.
Over 40 auto manufacturers world-wide have issued and
endorsed consistent gasoline specifications (the World-
wide Fuel Charter, WWFC) to define fuel properties
necessary to deliver enhanced emissions, performance
and durability for your vehicle. The manufacturer recom-
mends the use of gasolines that meet the WWFC speci-
fications if they are available.
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
Your engine is designed to meet all emissions regulations
and provide excellent fuel economy and performance
when using high quality unleaded “regular” gasoline
having an octane rating of 87. The routine use of pre-
mium gasoline is not recommended. Under normal con-
ditions the use of premium fuel will not provide a benefit
over high quality regular gasolines and in some circum-
stances may result in poorer performance.
Reformulated Gasoline
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline.”
Reformulated gasolines contain oxygenates, and are spe-
cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im-
prove air quality.
Light spark knock at low engine speeds is
not harmful to your engine. However, con-
tinued heavy spark knock at high speeds
can cause damage and immediate service
is required. Engine damage resulting from
operation with a heavy spark knock may
not be covered by the new vehicle warranty.
The manufacturer strongly supports the use of reformu-
lated gasolines. Properly blended reformulated gasolines
will provide excellent performance and durability for the
engine and fuel system components.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 185
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
used in your vehicle. The MMT content of gasoline may
not be indicated on the gasoline pump; therefore, you
should ask your gasoline retailer whether or not his/ her
gasoline contains MMT.
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy-
genates such as 10% ethanol, MTBE and ETBE. Oxygen-
ates are required in some areas of the country during the
winter months to reduce carbon monoxide emissions.
Fuels blended with these oxygenates may be used in
your vehicle.
It is even more important to look for gasolines without
MMT in Canada because MMT can be used at levels
higher than allowed in the United States. MMT is pro-
hibited in Federal and California reformulated gasolines.
CAUTION!
5
Sulfur In Gasoline
If you live in the northeast United States, your vehicle
may have been designed to meet California low emission
standards with Cleaner-Burning California reformulated
gasoline with low sulfur. If such fuels are not available in
states adopting California emission standards, your ve-
hicles will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal
specifications, but emission control system performance
may be adversely affected. Gasoline sold outside of
California is permitted to have higher sulfur levels which
may affect the performance of the vehicle’s catalytic
converter. This may cause the Check Engine or Service
Engine Soon light to illuminate. We recommend that you
try a different brand of unleaded gasoline having lower
DO NOT use gasolines containing METHANOL.
Gasoline containing methanol may damage critical
fuel system components.
MMT In Gasoline
MMT is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is
blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasolines
blended with MMT provide no performance advantage
beyond gasolines of the same octane number without
MMT. Gasolines blended with MMT reduce spark plug
life and reduce emission system performance in some
vehicles. We recommend that gasolines free of MMT be
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
186 STARTING AND OPERATING
sulfur to determine if the problem is fuel related prior to
returning your vehicle to an authorized dealer for ser-
vice.
ADDING FUEL
Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)
The gas cap is behind the fuel filler door. If the gas cap is
lost or damaged, be sure the replacement cap is for use
with this vehicle.
CAUTION!
If the Check Engine or Service Engine Soon light is
flashing, immediate service is required; see onboard
diagnostics system section.
CAUTION!
Damage to the fuel system or emission control
system could result from using an improper fuel
tank filler tube cap (gas cap). A poorly fitting cap
could let impurities into the fuel system.
Materials Added To Fuel
All gasolines sold in the United States are required to
contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional
detergents or other additives is not needed under normal
conditions and would result in unnecessary cost. There-
fore, you should not have to add anything to the fuel.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 187
Fuel Tank Filler Tube
WARNING!
NOTE: On some models, the fuel tank filler tube has a
restricting door about 2 inches (50 mm) down from the
opening. If fuel is poured from a portable container, the
container should have a flexible nozzle long enough to
force open the restricting door.
•
•
Remove the fuel tank filler tube cap (gas cap)
slowly to prevent fuel spray from the filler neck
which may cause injury.
The volatility of some gasolines may cause a
buildup of pressure in the fuel tank that may
increase while you drive. This pressure can result
in a spray of gasoline and/or vapors when the cap
is removed from a hot vehicle. Removing the cap
slowly allows the pressure to vent and prevents
fuel spray.
CAUTION!
5
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling.
•
•
Never allow any lit smoking materials near the
vehicles while removing the cap or filling the
tank.
NOTE: When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the
fuel tank is full.
Never add fuel to the vehicle when the engine is
running.
NOTE: Tighten the gas cap until you hear a “clicking”
sound. This is an indication that the gas cap is properly
tightened.
The Check Engine light will come on if the gas cap is
not properly secured. Make sure that the gas cap is
tightened each time the vehicle is refueled.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
188 STARTING AND OPERATING
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune or
malfunctioning and may require immediate service.
Contact your dealer for service assistance.
WARNING!
A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You
could be burned. Always place gas containers on the
ground while filling.
•
•
When pulling a heavy load or driving a fully loaded
vehicle when the humidity is low and the temperature
is high, use a premium unleaded fuel to help prevent
spark knock. If spark knock persists, lighten the load,
or engine piston damage may result.
Fuel System Cautions
The use of fuel additives which are now being sold as
octane enhancers is not recommended. Most of these
products contain high concentrations of methanol.
Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems
resulting from the use of such fuels or additives is not
the responsibility of the manufacturer and may not be
covered under the New Vehicle Warranty.
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
•
•
The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law.
Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance,
damage the emission control system, and could result
in loss of warranty coverage.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
An out-of-tune engine, or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions, can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 189
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
WARNING!
•
Keep the liftgate closed when driving your vehicle to
prevent carbon monoxide and other poisonous ex-
haust gases from entering the vehicle.
CATALYTIC CONVERTER
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning:
The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel
only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the
converter as an emission control device. Under normal
operating conditions, the catalytic converter will not
require maintenance. However, you must keep the en-
gine maintained to assure proper operation and prevent
possible damage.
•
Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas which can kill.
Never run the engine in a closed area, such as a
garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the vehicle is
stopped in an open area with the engine running for
more than a short period, adjust the ventilation system
to force fresh, outside air into the vehicle.
5
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems result in civil penalties being assessed against
you.
•
Guard against carbon monoxide with proper mainte-
nance. Have the exhaust system inspected every time
the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal conditions
repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with all side
windows fully open.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
190 STARTING AND OPERATING
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter dam-
age:
CAUTION!
Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. In
the event of engine malfunction, particularly involv-
ing engine misfire or other apparent loss of perfor-
mance, have your vehicle serviced promptly. Contin-
•
Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition
when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in
motion.
•
•
Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the
vehicle.
ued operation of your vehicle with
a
severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.
Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
testing.
•
•
Do not idle the engine for prolonged periods during
very rough idle or malfunctioning operating condi-
tions.
As with any vehicle do not park or operate this vehicle in
areas where combustible materials such as grass or leaves
can contact a hot exhaust system.
Do not allow vehicle to run out of fuel.
A scorching odor may appear if you continue to run a
malfunctioning engine. The odor may indicate severe
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, the
vehicle should be stopped, the engine shut off and the
vehicle allowed to cool. Service, including a tune-up to
manufacturer’s specifications should be obtained imme-
diately.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 191
VEHICLE LOADING
Hour of manufacture. The bar code that appears on the
bottom of the label is your Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN).
Certification Label
As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Admin-
istration Regulations, your vehicle has a certification
label affixed to the driver’s side door or pillar.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
including driver, passengers, vehicle, options, and cargo.
The label also specifies maximum capacities of front and
rear axle systems. Total load must be limited so that
GVWR is not exceeded.
5
Payload
The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable load
weight a truck can carry including the weight of the
driver, all passengers, options, and cargo.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the front
and rear axles. The load must be distributed in the cargo
area so that the GAWR of each axle is not exceeded.
This label contains the month and year of manufacture,
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) front and rear, and Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN). A Month-Day-Hour (MDH) number is
included on this label and shows the Month, Day, and
Each axle GAWR is determined by the component in the
system with the lowest load carrying capacity (axle,
springs, tires, or wheels).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
192 STARTING AND OPERATING
Heavier axles or suspension components sometimes
specified by purchasers for increased durability do not
necessarily increase the vehicle’s GVWR.
Loading
The actual total weight and the weight of the front and
rear of your vehicle at the ground can best be determined
by weighing it when it is loaded and ready for operation.
Tire Size
This is the minimum allowable tire size for your vehicle.
Replacement tires must be equal to the load capacity of
this tire size.
The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commer-
cial scale to insure that the GVWR has not been exceeded.
The weight on the front and rear of the vehicle should
then be determined separately to be sure that the load is
properly distributed over front and rear axle. Weighing
the vehicle may show that the GAWR of either the front
or rear axles has been exceeded but the total load is
within the specified GVWR. If so, weight must be shifted
from front to rear or rear to front as appropriate until the
specified weight limitations are met.
Rim Size
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size
listed.
Inflation Pressure (Cold)
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for
all loading conditions up to full GAWR.
Curb Weight
Store heavier items down low and be sure that the weight
is distributed equally. Stow all loose items securely before
driving.
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight
of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full
capacity conditions, and with no occupants or cargo
loaded into the vehicle. The front and rear curb weight
values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a
commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are
added.
Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effect
on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way
the brakes operate.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 193
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) 6500 LBS.
WARNING!
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
GVWR or the maximum front and rear GAWR. If
you do, parts on your vehicle can break, or it can
change the way your vehicle handles. This could
cause you to lose control. Also, overloading can
shorten the life of your vehicle.
5
A loaded vehicle is shown in the following example. Note
that neither GVWR nor GAWR capabilities are exceeded.
Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and
shorten service life.
NOTE:
The weights shown in this chart are not
necessarily the weights for your vehicle. Also, the
amount of load added to both the front and rear axles
can be computed after the vehicle has been weighed
both in its ؆curb weight؆ condition, and in its ؆loaded
and ready for operation؆ condition.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
194 STARTING AND OPERATING
LOADING WIDE BUILDING MATERIALS
WARNING!
Four foot wide building materials can be conveniently
carried in the Dakota pickup box. For occasional use up
to 600 lbs (272 kg) of unrestrained material [9 pcs. 3/ 4Љ
(19 mm) plywood] can be supported on 2 X 6 lumber
placed crossbody in indentations provided in the pickup
box inner walls. See illustration.
•
Care should always be exercised when operating a
vehicle with unrestrained cargo. Vehicle speeds
may need to be reduced. Severe turns or rough
roads may cause shifting or bouncing of the cargo
that may result in vehicle damage. If wide build-
ing materials are to be frequently carried, the
installation of a support is recommended. This
will restrain the cargo and transfer the load to the
pickup box floor.
•
•
If you wish to carry more than 600 lbs (272 kg) of
material suspended above the wheelhouse, sup-
ports must be installed to transfer the weight of
the load to the pickup box floor or vehicle damage
may result. The use of proper supports will permit
loading up to the rated payload.
Unrestrained cargo may be thrown forward in an
accident causing serious or fatal injury.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 195
See your dealer or a reputable installer of aftermarket
equipment for further information on the installation of
these supports.
TRAILER TOWING
To maintain warranty coverage, follow the requirements
and recommendations in this manual concerning ve-
hicles used for trailer towing.
WARNING!
Definitions
The following trailer towing related terminology defini-
tions will assist in understanding the subsequent sec-
tions:
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
5
GROSS COMBINATION WEIGHT RATING (GCWR)
is the total permissible weight of your vehicle and trailer
when weighed in combination. (Note that GCWR ratings
include a 68 kg (150 lb.) allowance for the presence of a
driver.) Tongue Weight (of a trailer) is the weight placed
on a vehicle’s trailer hitch by the trailer.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
Be sure every one in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly
GROSS TRAILER WEIGHT (GTW) is the weight of the
trailer plus the weight of all cargo, consumables and
equipment (permanent or temporary) loaded in or on the
trailer in its Љloaded and ready for operationЉ condition.
TRAILER SWAY CONTROL is a telescoping link that
can be installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
196 STARTING AND OPERATING
tongue that typically provides adjustable friction associ-
ated with the telescoping motion to dampen any un-
wanted trailer swaying motions while traveling.
NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options, or dealer-installed options,
must be considered as part of the total load on your
vehicle. Refer to the Certification label located at the
driver’s door for the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating.
CAUTION!
•
•
During the first 500 miles (805 km) your new
vehicle is driven, do not tow a trailer. Doing so
may damage your vehicle.
Perform maintenance services as prescribed in the Main-
tenance Schedules section. When your vehicle is used for
trailer towing, never exceed the gross axle weight rating
(GAWR) and GVWR.
When first towing a trailer, limit your speed to 50
mph (80 km/h) during the first 500 miles (805 km)
of towing.
WARNING!
Improper towing can lead to an injury accident.
Follow these guidelines to make your trailer towing
as safe as possible:
Consider the following items when computing the
weight on the rear axle:
•
•
the tongue weight of the trailer
•
Be sure the trailer is loaded heavier in front, with 60%
to 65% of the weight located ahead of the trailer’s
axles(s) sufficiently to place result in tongue weights of
between 10% and 15% of the GTW loaded trailer
weight on the tow hitch of your vehicle. (For a Љ5th
the weight of any other type of cargo or equipment put
in or on your vehicle
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 197
WheelЉ style trailer, this range of loading on the ЉKing
PinЉ should be between 15% and 25%.) Loads balanced
over the wheels or biased toward Љheavier in the rearЉ
can cause the trailer to sway severely side to side
which will cause loss of control of vehicle and trailer.
Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of
many trailer accidents.
•
Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer and
will not shift during travel. When trailering cargo that
cannot be fully secured, dynamic load shifts can occur
that may be difficult for the driver to control.
•
•
•
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on
your vehicle.
Safety chains must always be used between your
vehicle and trailer.
•
•
Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system of
your vehicle with that of the trailer. This could cause
inadequate braking and possible personal injury.
5
Connect trailer lighting and brakes using factory har-
nesses only. Do not cut or splice any wiring to the
brake circuits.
Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over 1,000
lbs. (454 kg) and required for trailers in excess of 2,000
lbs. (907 kg).
Trailer and Tongue Weight
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) means the weight of the
trailer plus the weight of all cargo and equipment loaded
on the trailer when in actual underway towing condition.
The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your
fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight
of the trailer must be supported by the scale.
•
•
Use an approved trailer harness and connector. If a
hitch is ordered, the proper wiring will be provided.
When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not over-
load your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can cause a
loss of control, poor performance or damage to brakes,
axle, engine, transmission, steering, suspension, chas-
sis structure or tires.
Tongue Weight is the weight placed on the vehicle’s
trailer hitch by the trailer. Always load a trailer with 60%
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
198 STARTING AND OPERATING
to 65% of the weight in the front of the trailer. This places
10% to 15% of the GTW on the tow hitch of your vehicle.
With a Class II Hitch, your vehicle can be equipped to
tow trailers with a Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) of 3,500
lbs. (1,587 kg) maximum. Tongue weight must be equal to
at least 10% of GTW, but no more that 15% of GTW.
With a Class III Hitch, your vehicle can be equipped to
tow trailers with a Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) of 5,000
lbs. (2,268 kg) maximum. Tongue weight must be equal to
at least 10% of GTW, but no more that 15% of GTW.
With a Class IV Hitch, you can tow a trailer with a Gross
Trailer Weight of up to 6,700 lbs. (3039 kg.) depending on
your vehicle equipment. The Trailer Tow Package in-
cludes the platform hitch receiver, and a 7 lead wiring
harness mounted on the hitch.
Trailer sway control and equalizing hitch are required for
tongue weights above 350 lbs. (159 kg).
NOTE: When towing a trailer, the following require-
ments must be adhered to:
Trailer Towing—Hitches:
•
•
GCWR must not be exceeded
With a Class I Hitch, your vehicle can be equipped to tow
trailers with a Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) of 2,000 lbs.
(907 kg) maximum. Vehicles equipped with a rear step
bumper are rated for a Class I Hitch.
Total weight must be distributed between the tow
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
(4) ratings are not exceeded:
1. GVWR
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 199
2. GTW
In Canada, refer to the following website address:
http:// www.dodge.ca.
3. Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch uti-
lized (This requirement may limit the ability to
always achieve the 10% to 15% range of tongue
weight [15% to 25% for a ؆5th Wheel؆ style trailer]
as a percentage of total trailer weight.)
Trailer Towing Requirements
All Dodge Dakota trucks are intended to tow trailers up
to 2,000 lbs. without added equipment or alterations to
standard equipment. Your vehicle may be factory
equipped for safe towing of trailers weighing over 2,000
lbs. with the Trailer Tow Package. The electrical part of
this package includes an instruction sheet, a 7/ 4 pin
adaptor, a wiring pigtail for an aftermarket electric trailer
brake controller, and three relays that must be installed
into the power distribution center. These items are stored
in the glove box. Also included in the Trailer Tow
Package are two fuses and a relay that are located on the
driver’s side of the engine compartment on a harness
near the Power Distribution Center. This relay and the
fuses power up the trailer towing option. See your Dodge
dealer for further information.
4. GAWR ratings
NOTE: Towing a trailer equipped with more than the
standard lighting (turn, tail, stop and backup lights) may
cause an abnormally high electrical current draw through
the headlight switch, causing the switch to fail. To
prevent a recurring switch failure install a trailer tow
wiring harness overlay kit with relay to bypass headlight
switch (available from your dealer).
5
Trailer Towing Information (Maximum Trailer
Weight Ratings)
؆Trailer Towing Guide؆
If you regularly pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
stop and turn signals on the trailer are recommended for
motoring safety. To handle the additional electrical load
NOTE: For trailer towing information (maximum
trailer weight ratings) refer to the following website
address: http:// www.dodge.com/towing.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
200 STARTING AND OPERATING
of the trailer lights and assure their proper functioning, a
heavy duty turn signal flasher can be installed as a
separate equipment item by your dealer.
Trailer Tow Wiring
The Trailer Tow Package includes a wiring harness
located at the rear underbody of the vehicle.
NOTE: Connect trailer lighting and brakes using fac-
tory harnesses only. Do not cut or splice wiring to the
brake circuits.
WARNING!
The direct connection of hydraulic brake lines from
vehicle brake system to trailer system is not accept-
able. The extra load may cause brake failure and you
may be injured.
The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle
but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector.
Refer to the following table for wire color and function.
Wire Color
Black
Function
Ground Wire
Heavy trailer towing also may require breakaway electric
trailer brakes, anti-sway devices or equalizing hitches for
safe operation. Such devices are commonly required by
state law.
Blue
Trailer Brake
Black/ Orange
Red/ Tan
Tail & Running Lamps
Battery
Dk. Green/ Red
Brown/ Red
Violet/ Black
Lt. Stop & Turn Signal
Rt. Stop & Turn Signal
Backup Lamps
For all trailer tow or heavy-duty applications it is
strongly recommended that the factory fill rear axle
lubricant be replaced with an SAE 75W-140 synthetic
gear lubricant. Mopar Synthetic Gear Lubricant is of
this type.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 201
Cooling System Tips—Trailer Towing
To reduce potential for engine and transmission over-
heating, take the following actions:
SNOWPLOW
Dodge Dakota Models
NOTE: Do not use Dodge Dakota Models for snow-
plow applications.
•
City Driving —When stopped for short periods of
time, put transmission in neutral and increase engine
idle speed.
WARNING!
•
•
Highway Driving —Reduce your speed.
Air Conditioning —Turn off temporarily.
Snowplows, winches, and other aftermarket equip-
ment should not be added to the front end or your
vehicle. The airbag crash sensors may be affected by
the change in the front end structure. The airbags
could deploy unexpectedly or could fail to deploy
during a collision resulting in serious injury or
death.
5
See Cooling System Operating information in the Main-
tenance section of this manual for more information.
To reduce potential for automatic transmission overheat-
ing, turn the Overdrive OFF when driving in hilly areas
or shift the transmission to Drive position 2 on more
severe grades. Move the shift lever to the next lower
position to eliminate excessive transmission shifting. This
action will also reduce the possibility of transmission
overheating and provide better engine braking.
CAUTION!
Using this vehicle for snowplow applications can
cause damage to the vehicle.
NOTE: If your vehicle has an automatic transmission
and you tow a trailer frequently follow Maintenance
Schedule “B”.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
202 STARTING AND OPERATING
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
Recreational Towing Procedure
MOTORHOME, ETC.) OF 4X4 VEHICLES
Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for
recreational towing.
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
Internal damage to the transfer case will occur if a
front or rear wheel lift is used when recreational
towing.
It is necessary to follow these steps to be certain that
the transfer case is fully in Neutral (N) before
recreational towing to prevent damage to internal
parts.
NOTE: Both the NV233 and NV244 transfer cases must
be shifted into Neutral (N) for recreational towing. The
Neutral (N) selection button is located on the lower left
hand corner of the 4WD Control Switch. Shifts into and
out of transfer case Neutral (N) can take place with the
selector switch in any mode position. Automatic Trans-
missions must be placed in P (Park) position for recre-
ational towing. Manual Transmissions must be placed in
gear (for example, 4th gear) for recreational towing.
1. Bring vehicle to a complete stop.
2. Shut engine OFF.
3. Place ignition key in the ON position.
4. Depress brake pedal.
5. Shift automatic transmission to Neutral (N) or depress
clutch on manual transmission.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 203
6. Using the point of a ballpoint pen or similar object,
depress the recessed transfer case Neutral (N) button for
4 seconds.
NOTE: Items 1 through 5 are requirements that must be
met prior to depressing the Neutral (N) selection button,
and must continue to be met until the 4 seconds elaspes
and the shift has been completed. If any of these require-
ments (with the exception of 3 - Key ON) are not met
prior to depressing the Neutral (N) button or are no
longer met during the 4 second timer, then the Neutral
(N) indicator light will flash continuously until all re-
quirements are met or until the Neutral (N) button is
released.
7. After shift is completed and the Neutral (N) light
comes on release Neutral (N) button.
8. Start engine.
9. Shift automatic transmission into Reverse (R).
5
10. Release brake pedal for five seconds and ensure that
there is no vehicle movement.
NOTE: The ignition key must be ON for a shift to take
place and for the position indicator lights to be operable.
If the key in not ON, the shift will not take place and no
position indicator lights will be on or flashing.
11. Repeat steps 9 and 10 with the transmission in Drive
(D).
12. Shut engine OFF and place ignition key to the
unlocked OFF position.
NOTE: Flashing neutral (N) position indicator light
indicates that shift requirements have not been met.
13. Shift automatic transmission into Park (P). Shift
Manual transmissions into 4th gear.
14. Attach vehicle to tow vehicle with tow bar.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
204 STARTING AND OPERATING
6. Using the point of a ballpoint pen or similar object,
depress the recessed transfer case Neutral (N) button for
1 second.
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the trans-
mission is shifted into Park (P) with the transfer case
in Neutral (N) and the engine RUNNING. With the
transfer case in Neutral (N) ensure that the engine is
OFF prior to shifting the transmission into Park (P).
7. After the Neutral (N) indicator light turns off release
the Neutral (N) button.
8. After the Neutral (N) button has been released the
transfer case will shift to the position identified by the
selector switch.
Returning to Normal Operation
9. Shift automatic transmission into Drive (D), release
the clutch on manual transmission.
Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for
normal usage.
NOTE: Items 1 through 5 are requirements that must be
met prior to depressing the Neutral (N) selection button,
and must continue to be met until 1 second elapses and
the shift has been completed. If any of these requirements
(with the exception of 3 - key ON) are not met prior to
depressing the Neutral (N) button or are no longer met
during the 1 second time, then all of the mode position
indicator lights will flash continuously until all require-
ments are met or until the Neutral (N) button is released.
1. Bring vehicle to a complete stop.
2. Shut engine OFF.
3. Place ignition key in the ON position.
4. Depress brake pedal.
5. Shift automatic transmission to Neutral (N) or depress
clutch on manual transmission.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 205
NOTE: The ignition key must be ON for a shift to take
place and for the position indicator lights to be operable.
If the key is not ON, the shift will not take place and no
position indicator lights will be on or flashing.
CAUTION!
•
•
Do not use a bumper mounted clamp-on tow bar
on your vehicle. The bumper face bar will be
damaged.
NOTE: Flashing neutral (N) position indicator light
indicates that shift requirements have not been met.
Do not disconnect the rear driveshaft because
fluid will leak from the transfer case and damage
internal parts.
WARNING!
5
You or others could be injured if you leave the
vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the
Neutral (N) position without first fully engaging the
parking brake. The transfer case Neutral (N) position
disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from
the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to move
despite the transmission position. The parking
brake should always be applied when the driver is
not in the vehicle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
206 STARTING AND OPERATING
TRACTION
EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION PLATE
The equipment Identification Plate is located on the hood
inner surface.
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a
wedge of water to build up between the tire and road
surface. This is known as hydroplaning and may cause
partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping
ability. To reduce this possibility, the following precau-
tions should be observed:
The following information about your vehicle is dis-
played on this plate: Model, Wheelbase, Vehicle Identifi-
cation Number, Truck Order Number, and code numbers
with descriptions of all production and special equip-
ment on the truck as shipped from the factory.
1. Slow down during rainstorms or when roads are
slushy.
NOTE: Always refer to the Equipment Identification
2. Slow down if road has standing water or puddles.
Plate When Ordering Parts.
3. Replace tires when tread wear indicators first become
visible.
4. Keep tires properly inflated.
5. Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and
the car in front to avoid a collision in a sudden stop.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
Ⅵ Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Ⅵ Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Ⅵ Changing A Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
▫ Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
▫ Jack Removal And Stowage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
▫ Removing The Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
▫ Tire Changing Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Ⅵ Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Ⅵ Towing A Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
▫ Four-Wheel Drive Vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
▫ Two-Wheel Drive Vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
208 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
HAZARD WARNING FLASHER
If it is necessary to leave the vehicle to go for service, the
flasher system will continue to operate with the ignition
key removed and the vehicle locked.
The flasher switch is on the top of the steering column,
just behind the steering wheel. Press the flasher switch
and all front and rear directional signals will flash
intermittently.
ADDING FUEL
On some models, the fuel tank filler tube, on vehicles
equipped with a catalytic converter, has a restricting door
about 2 inches (50 mm) inside the opening. If using a
portable fuel container, it should have a flexible nozzle
long enough to force open the restricting door.
Press the switch a second time to turn off the emergency
flashers.
WARNING!
A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a
portable container that is in a vehicle or on a truck
bed. You could be burned. Always place gas contain-
ers on the ground while filling.
This is an emergency warning system and should not be
used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your
vehicle is disabled and is creating a safety hazard for
other motorists.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 209
CHANGING A FLAT TIRE
WARNING!
Jack Location
Remove the gas cap slowly to prevent fuel spray
from the filler neck which may cause injury.
The jack, jack drive tube, 2 tube extensions, and wheel
wrench are located behind the seat on the passenger’s
side of the vehicle.
The volatility of present gasolines may cause a build
up of pressure in the fuel tank that may increase
while you drive. This pressure can result in a spray
of gasoline and/or vapors when you remove the cap
from a hot vehicle. Removing the cap slowly allows
the pressure to vent and prevents fuel spray.
WARNING!
The jack is designed as a tool for changing tires only.
The jack should not be used to lift the vehicle for
service purposes, unless suitable supports are placed
under the vehicle as a safety measure. The vehicle
should be jacked on a firm level surface only. Avoid
ice or slippery areas.
Never allow any lit smoking materials near the
vehicles while removing the cap or filling the tank.
6
Never add fuel to the vehicle when the engine is
running.
•
•
In the Regular Cab the jack and tools are stowed under
a formation in the carpet behind the passenger seat.
In the Quad Cab the jack and tools are stowed under
the rear seat. Lift the passenger side rear seat cushion
to gain access to this area.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
210 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
•
In the Club Cab the jack and tools are stowed in a floor
compartment located under the rear seat on the pas-
senger’s side of the vehicle. The seat cushion can be
lifted to a vertical position to allow access to this
compartment.
•
For jack stowage, place the jack beneath the retain-
ing hoop and turn the jack screw clockwise until the
jack is firmly secured within the retaining hoop.
Refer to the graphic below. The seat has been
removed for clarity.
Quad Cab Jack Stowage
Jack Removal and Stowage
Removing The Spare Tire
a. Quad Cab models have a Hoop–Style stowage follow
the instructions below:
Remove the spare tire before attempting to jack the truck.
Attach the wheel wrench to the jack extension tube. Insert
the tube through the access hole in the rear bumper and
into the winch mechanism tube. Rotate the wheel wrench
•
For jack removal, turn the screw counterclockwise
to remove the jack from beneath the retaining hoop.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 211
handle counterclockwise until the spare tire is on the
ground with enough cable slack to allow you to pull it
out from under the vehicle. When the spare is clear, tilt
the retainer at the end of the cable and pull it through the
center of the wheel.
Tire Changing Procedure
WARNING!
Getting under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never get any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack. Never start or run
the engine while the vehicle is on a jack. If you need
to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a service
center where it can be raised on a lift.
6
Do not raise this vehicle using a bumper jack. The jack is
designed as a tool for changing tires on this vehicle only.
It is not recommended that the jack be used for service
purposes or to lift more than one wheel at a time.
Preparations
It is recommended that you stow the flat or spare to
avoid tangling the loose cable.
Park the vehicle on a firm level surface, avoiding ice or
slippery areas. Set the parking brake and place the gear
selector in PARK (automatic transmission) or REVERSE
(manual transmission). On four-wheel drive vehicles,
shift the transfer case to the “4L” position.
NOTE: The winch mechanism is designed for use with
the jack extension tube only. Use of an air wrench or other
power tools is not recommended and can damage the
winch.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
212 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Instructions
WARNING!
1. Remove the spare wheel, jack, and tools from storage.
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
2. Remove wheel center cap using the spade end of the
wheel wrench.
3. Using the wheel wrench, loosen, but do not remove,
the wheel nuts by turning them counterclockwise one
turn while the wheel is still on the ground.
•
Turn on the Hazard Warning Flasher.
Block both the front and rear
•
4. When changing a front wheel, place the jack under the
frame rail behind the wheel. Locate the jack as far
forward as possible on the straight part of the frame.
Make sure that the upstanding tab of the jack contacts the
vertical side of the frame. Operate the jack using the jack
drive tube and the wheel wrench— the tube extension,
may be used but is not required.
of the wheel diagonally oppo-
site the jacking position. For
example, if the right front
wheel is being changed, block
the left rear wheel.
•
Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the
vehicle is being jacked.
When changing a rear wheel, assemble the jack drive
tube to the jack and connect the drive tube to the
extension tube. Place the jack under the axle between the
spring and the shock absorber with the drive tubes
extending to the rear. Connect the jack tube extension and
wheel wrench.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 213
Before raising the wheel off the ground, make sure that
the jack will not damage surrounding truck parts and
adjust the jack position as required.
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make
the vehicle unstable and cause an accident. It could
slip off the jack and hurt someone near it. Raise the
vehicle only enough to remove the tire.
6. Remove the wheel nuts and pull the wheel off. Install
the spare wheel and wheel nuts with the cone shaped end
of the nuts toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the nuts. To
avoid risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not fully
tighten the nuts until the vehicle has been lowered.
6
7. Using the wheel wrench, finish tightening the nuts in
a crisscross pattern.Correct nut tightness is 85-115 ft. lbs.
(115-155 N·m) torque. If in doubt about the correct
tightness, have them checked with a torque wrench by
your dealer or at a service station.
5. By rotating the wheel wrench clockwise, raise the
vehicle until the wheel just clears the surface.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
214 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could injure someone in the vehicle.
Always stow the jack parts and the extra tire and
wheel in the places provided.
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to
help prevent personal injury or damage to your
vehicle:
•
Always park on a firm, level surface as far from
the edge of the roadway as possible before raising
the vehicle.
8. Install wheel center cap and remove wheel blocks. Do
not install chrome or aluminum wheel center caps on the
spare wheel. This may result in cap damage.
•
Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to
be raised.
•
•
•
Apply the parking brake firmly before jacking.
Never start the engine with the vehicle on a jack.
9. Lower the jack to its fully closed position. Stow the
replaced tire, jack, and tools as previously described.
Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on
a jack.
10. Adjust the tire pressure when possible.
NOTE: Do not oil wheel studs. For chrome wheels, do
not substitute with chrome plated wheel nuts.
•
•
•
Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack.
Only use the jack in the positions indicated.
If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 215
To Stow The Flat Or Spare
JUMP STARTING
Turn the wheel so that the valve stem is down. Slide the
wheel retainer through the center of the wheel and
position it properly across the wheel opening.
WARNING!
•
•
Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution; do not
allow battery fluid to contact eyes, skin or cloth-
ing. Don’t lean over battery when attaching
clamps or allow the clamps to touch each other. If
acid splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the con-
taminated area immediately with large quantities
of water.
For convenience in checking the spare tire inflation, stow
with the valve stem toward the rear of the vehicle.
Attach the wheel wrench to the extension tube. Rotate the
winch mechanism until the wheel is drawn into place
against the underside of the vehicle. Continue to rotate
until you feel the winch mechanism slip or click 3 or 4
times. It cannot be overtightened. Push against the tire
several times to be sure it is firmly in place.
6
A battery generates hydrogen gas which is flam-
mable and explosive. Keep flame or spark away
from the vent holes. Do not use a booster battery
or any other booster source with an output that
exceeds 12 volts.
Check the Battery Test Indicator (if equipped). If a yellow
or bright colored dot is visible in the indicator (if
equipped), DO NOT jump-start the battery.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
216 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
If the indicator (if equipped) is dark or shows a green dot,
proceed as follows:
WARNING!
Do not permit vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection and personal
injury could result.
1. Wear eye protection and remove all metal jewelry such
as watch bands or bracelets which might make an
unintended electrical contact.
2. Park the booster vehicle within cable reach but with-
out letting the vehicles touch. Set the parking brake, place
the automatic transmission in PARK or the manual
transmission in NEUTRAL and turn the ignition OFF on
both vehicles.
5. Connect the other cable, first to the negative terminal
of the booster battery and then to the engine of the
vehicle with the discharged battery. Make sure you have
a good contact on the engine.
3. Turn OFF heater, radio and all unnecessary electrical
loads.
4. Connect one end of a jumper cable to the positive
terminal of the booster battery. Connect the other end of
the same cable to the positive terminal of the discharged
battery.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 217
WARNING!
WARNING!
Do not connect the cable to the negative post of the
discharge battery. The resulting electrical spark
could cause the battery to explode.
Any procedure other than above could result in:
1. Personal injury caused by electrolyte squirting
out the battery vent;
During cold weather when temperatures are below
freezing point, electrolyte in a discharged battery
may freeze. Do not attempt jump starting because
the battery could rupture or explode. The battery
temperature must be brought up above freezing
point before attempting jump start.
2. Personal injury or property damage due to battery
explosion;
3. Damage to charging system of booster vehicle or
of immobilized vehicle.
6
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent
damage to your vehicle. Use of safety chains is recom-
mended. Attach towing device to main structural mem-
bers of the vehicle — not to bumpers or associated
brackets. State and local laws applying to vehicles
under tow must be observed.
6. Start the engine in the vehicle which has the booster
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, then start the
engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery.
7. When removing the jumper cables, reverse the above
sequence exactly. Be careful of the moving belts and fan.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
218 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Four-Wheel Drive Vehicles
If the vehicle is to be towed more than 15 miles (25 km),
it must be towed on a flatbed, or with the rear wheels
raised and the front wheels on the ground, or with the
front end raised and the rear wheels on a towing dolly.
The manufacturer recommends towing with all wheels
off the ground. Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle
on a flatbed or with one end of the vehicle raised and the
opposite end on a towing dolly.
Two-Wheel Drive Vehicles
Provided that the transmission is operable, tow with the
transmission in Neutral and the ignition key in the OFF
position along with the front wheels raised and the rear
wheels on the ground. The speed must not exceed 30
mph (50 km/ h) and the distance must not exceed 15
miles (25 km).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
Ⅵ Engine Compartment 3.7L V6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Ⅵ Engine Compartment 4.7L V-8 . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Ⅵ Onboard Diagnostic System — OBD II . . . . . . 223
▫ Ignition Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
▫ Engine Fuel Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
▫ Catalytic Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
▫ Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
▫ Power Steering — Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
▫ Front Suspension Ball Joints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
▫ Steering Linkage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Ⅵ Emissions Inspection And Maintenance
Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
7
Ⅵ Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Ⅵ Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Ⅵ Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
▫ Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
▫ Engine Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
▫ Drive Belts — Check Condition And Tension . . 230
▫ Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
▫ Drive Shaft Constant Velocity
Joints — 4X4 Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
▫ Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
220 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
▫ Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
▫ Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
▫ Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
▫ Emission Related Components . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
▫ Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
▫ Clutch Hydraulic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
▫ Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
▫ Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
▫ Axles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
▫ Selection Of Lubricating Grease . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Ⅵ Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Ⅵ Replacement Light Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Ⅵ Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
▫ Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
▫ Parking/ Turn Signal Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
▫ Rear Side Marker, Tail Lights, Turn Signals
And Backup Lights — Replacement . . . . . . . . 256
▫ License Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
▫ Center High-Mounted Stoplight . . . . . . . . . . . 257
▫ Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Ⅵ Fluids And Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Ⅵ Recommended Fluids, Lubricants And
Genuine Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
▫ Appearance Care And Protection From
Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
▫ Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
▫ Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Ⅵ Power Distribution Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Ⅵ Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 221
ENGINE COMPARTMENT 3.7L V6
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
222 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT 4.7L V-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 223
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
CAUTION!
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard
diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors
the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic
transmission control systems. When these systems are
operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emis-
sions well within current government regulations.
•
•
Prolonged driving with the “Malfunction Indica-
tor Light” on could cause further damage to the
emission control system. It could also affect fuel
economy and driveability. The vehicle must be
serviced before any emissions tests can be per-
formed.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light.” It will
also store diagnostic codes and other information to
assist your service technician in making repairs. Al-
though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
need towing, see your dealer for service as soon as
possible.
If the “Malfunction Indicator Light” is flashing
while the engine is running, severe catalytic con-
verter damage and power loss will soon occur.
Immediate service is required.
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
224 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS
2. Turn the ignition to the ON position, but do not crank
or start the engine.
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass
an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
3. If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start
this test over.
4. As soon as you turn your key to the ON position, you
will see your MIL symbol come on as part of a normal
bulb check.
For states which have an I/ M (Inspection and
Maintenance) requirement, this check verifies the
following: the MIL (Malfunction Indicator Lamp)
is functioning and is not on when the engine is running,
and that the OBD (On Board Diagnostic) system is ready
for testing.
5. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will
happen:
a. The MIL light will blink for approximately 5
seconds and then remain on until the first engine
crank or the key is turned off. This means that your
vehicle’s OBD system is not ready and you should
not proceed to the I/ M station.
Normally, the OBD system will be ready. The OBD
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
serviced, if you recently had a dead battery, or a battery
replacement. If the OBD system should be determined
not ready for the I/ M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
b. The MIL light will remain fully illuminated until
the first engine crank or the key is turned off. This
means that your vehicle’s OBD system is ready and
you can proceed to the I/ M station.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition key actuated test
which you can use prior to going to the test station. To
check if your vehicle’s OBD system is ready, you must do
the following:
If your OBD system is not ready, you should see your
1. Insert your ignition key into the ignition switch.
dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was recently
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 225
serviced or had a battery failure or replacement, you may
need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle as you
normally would in order for your OBD system to update.
A recheck with the above test routine may then indicate
that the system is now ready.
DEALER SERVICE
Your dealer has the qualified service personnel, special
tools and equipment to perform all service operations in
an expert manner. Service manuals are available which
include detailed service information for your vehicle.
Refer to these manuals before attempting any procedure
yourself.
Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD system is
ready or not ready, if the MIL symbol is illuminated
during normal vehicle operation, you should have your
vehicle serviced before going to the I/ M station. The I/ M
station can fail your vehicle because the MIL symbol is on
with the engine running.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
WARNING!
REPLACEMENT PARTS
7
Use of genuine Mopar parts for normal/ scheduled
maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to in-
sure the designed performance. Damage or failures
caused by the use of non-Mopar parts for maintenance
and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer’s
warranty.
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only that service work for which
you have the knowledge and the proper equipment.
If you have any doubt about your ability to perform
a service job, take your vehicle to a competent
mechanic.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
226 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Maintain
the oil level between the ADD and SAFE markings on the
dipstick. Adding one quart of oil when the reading is at
the ADD mark will result in a SAFE reading on these
engines.
The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
services determined by the engineers who designed your
vehicle.
Besides the maintenance items for which there are fixed
maintenance intervals, there are other items that should
operate satisfactorily without periodic maintenance.
However, if a malfunction of these items does occur, it
could adversely affect the engine or vehicle performance.
These items should be inspected if a malfunction is
observed or suspected.
It is important to check the oil while the vehicle is on
level ground. Add oil only when the level is at or below
the ADD OIL mark.
Engine Oil
Checking Engine Oil Level
To assure proper lubrication of your vehicle’s engine, the
engine oil must be maintained at the correct level. The
best time to check the engine oil level is about 5 minutes
after a fully warmed up engine is shut off or before
starting the engine after it has sat overnight.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 227
•
•
•
•
Trailer towing
CAUTION!
Taxi, Police or delivery service (commercial service)
Off-road or desert operation
Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will cause
oil aeration or loss of oil pressure. This could dam-
age your engine.
If equipped for and operating with E-85 (ethanol)
fuel.
Frequency Of Oil Change
NOTE: If ANY of these apply to you then change your
engine oil every 3,000 miles (5 000 km) or 3 months,
whichever comes first and follow schedule “B” of the
ЉMaintenance SchedulesЉ section of this manual.
Road conditions and your style of driving affect the
interval at which your oil should be changed. Check the
following to determine if any apply to you:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Day or night temperatures are below 32°F (0°C).
Stop and go driving.
If none of these apply to you, then change your engine oil
at every interval shown on schedule ЉAЉ of the ЉMainte-
nance SchedulesЉ section of this manual.
7
Extensive engine idling.
4x4 Models, If Used Primarily For Off-Road
Operation
Every 50 hours of use.
Driving in dusty conditions
Short trips of less than 10 miles (16.2 km)
More than 50% of your driving is at sustained high
speeds during hot weather, above 32°C (90°F)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
228 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Dusty Conditions
This symbol means that the oil has
been certified by the American
Petroleum Institute (API). The
manufacture only recommends
API Certified engine oils that
Driving through dust-laden air increases the problems of
keeping abrasive materials out of the engine. Under these
conditions, special attention should be given to the
engine air cleaner and the crankcase inlet air cleaner. The
crankcase ventilation system should also be checked
periodically. Make sure that these units are always clean.
This will tend to reduce to a minimum the amount of
abrasive material that may enter the engine.
meet
the
requirements
of
DaimlerChrysler Material Stan-
dard MS-6395. Use Mopar or an
equivalent oil meeting the specifi-
cation MS-6395.
Engine Oil Selection
For best performance and maximum protection under all
types of operating conditions, the manufacture only
recommends engine oils that are API certified and meet
the requirements of DaimlerChrysler Material Standard
MS-6395. Use Mopar or an equivalent oil meeting the
specification MS-6395.
Engine Oil Viscosity Chart
The proper SAE viscosity grade of engine oil should be
selected based on the following recommendation and be
within the operating temperature shown in the recom-
mended SAE viscosity chart.
•
•
SAE 5W-30 is the oil recommended in trucks equipped
with a 3.7L/ 4.7L engine, for optimum fuel economy.
American Petroleum Institute (API) Oil
Identification Symbol
There is a symbol to aid you in selecting the proper
engine oil.
Synthetic engine oils may be used provided that the oil
quality requirements described above are met and the
recommended maintenance intervals for oil and filter
changes are followed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 229
•
Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil
certification mark or current service symbol and the
correct viscosity grade number should not be used.
Materials Added to Engine Oil
The manufacture strongly recommends against the addi-
tion of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to
the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and
it’s performance may be impaired by supplemental ad-
ditives.
Disposing of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
environment. Contact your dealer, service station, or
governmental agency for advice on how and where used
oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area.
7
Engine Oil Filter
3.7L/4.7L Engines
The engine oil filter should be replaced at every engine
oil change.
Synthetic Engine Oils
There are a number of engine oils being promoted as
either synthetic or semi-synthetic. If you chose to use
such a product, use only those oils that meet the Ameri-
can Petroleum Institute (API) and SAE viscosity stan-
dard. Follow the service schedule that describes your
driving type.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
The manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type oil
filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality
of replacement filters varies considerably. Only high
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
230 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
quality filters should be used to assure most efficient
service. Mopar Engine Oil Filters are a high quality oil
filter and are recommended.
Chart. New plugs should be installed at this mileage. The
entire set should be replaced if there is any malfunction
due to a faulty spark plug. Check the Vehicle Emissions
Control Information label for the proper type of spark
plug for your vehicle.
Drive Belts — Check Condition and Tension
At the mileage indicated in the maintenance schedule, all
belts should be checked for condition and proper tension.
Improper belt tension can cause belt slippage and failure.
CAUTION!
Belts should be inspected for evidence of cuts, cracks, or
glazing, and replaced if there is indication of damage
which could result in belt failure. If adjustment is re-
quired, see your authorized dealer for service. Low
generator belt tension can cause battery failure. A special
tool is required to properly measure tension and to
restore belt tension to factory specifications.
When replacing plugs, do not overtighten. You could
damage them and cause them to leak.
Ignition Cables
Replace the ignition cables at the mileage interval shown
in the maintenance charts.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
Also check belt routing to make sure there is no interfer-
ence between the belts and other engine components.
Under normal driving conditions, replace the air filter at
the intervals shown on Schedule “A”. If, however, you
drive the vehicle frequently under dusty or severe con-
ditions, the filter element should be inspected periodi-
cally and replaced if necessary at the intervals shown on
Schedule “B”.
Spark Plugs
Spark plugs must fire properly to assure proper engine
performance and emission control. The plugs installed in
your vehicle should operate satisfactorily in normal
service for the mileage indicated in the Maintenance
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 231
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic con-
verter will not require maintenance. However, it is im-
portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
damage.
WARNING!
The air cleaner can provide a measure of protection
in the case of engine backfire. Do not remove the air
cleaner unless such removal is necessary for repair or
maintenance. Make sure that no one is near the
engine compartment before starting the vehicle with
the air cleaner removed. Failure to do so can result in
serious personal injury.
CAUTION!
Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. In
the event of engine malfunction, particularly involv-
ing engine misfire or other apparent loss of perfor-
mance, have your vehicle serviced promptly. Contin-
Engine Fuel Filter
A plugged fuel filter can cause stalling, limit the speed at
which a vehicle can be driven or cause hard starting.
Should an excessive amount of dirt accumulate in the
fuel tank, frequent filter replacement may be necessary.
7
ued operation of your vehicle with
a
severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and the
vehicle.
Catalytic Converter
The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel
only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the
catalyst as an emission control device.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
232 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
To minimize the possibility of catalyst damage:
WARNING!
•
Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition
when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in
motion.
A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over
materials that can burn. Such materials might be
grass or leaves coming into contact with your ex-
haust system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in
areas where your exhaust system can contact any-
thing that can burn.
•
•
Do not try to start engine by pushing or towing the
vehicle.
Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough
idling or malfunctioning operating conditions.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may indicate severe
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, the
vehicle should be stopped, the engine shut off and the
vehicle allowed to cool. Thereafter, service, including a
tune-up to manufacturer’s specifications, should be ob-
tained immediately.
Maintenance-Free Battery
All Dodge trucks are equipped with maintenance-free
batteries. You will never have to add water, nor is
periodic maintenance required.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 233
WARNING!
CAUTION!
Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories con-
tain lead and lead compounds. Always wash hands
after handling the battery.
It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to the
negative post. Battery posts are marked (+) positive
and negative (-) and identified on the battery case.
Also, if a “fast charger” is used while battery is in the
vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables be-
fore connecting the charger to battery. Do not use a
“fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
7
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should be checked and serviced by an Authorized Dealer
at the start of each warm season. This service should
include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance
test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this
time.
To determine the battery charge, check the battery test
indicator (if equipped) on top of the battery. Refer to the
illustration.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
234 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Power Steering — Fluid Check
WARNING!
Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined
service interval is not required. The fluid should only be
checked if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises are
apparent, and/ or the system is not functioning as antici-
pated. Coordinate inspection efforts through a certified
DaimlerChrysler Dealership.Љ
•
•
Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air condi-
tioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause
the system to fail, requiring costly repairs.
WARNING!
The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected
should be done by an experienced repairman.
Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and
with the engine off to prevent injury from moving
parts and to insure accurate fluid level reading. Do
not overfill. Use only manufacturers recommended
power steering fluid.
Refrigerant Recovery and Recycling
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluorocar-
bon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental Pro-
tection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. How-
ever, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning
service be performed by dealers or other service facilities
using recovery and recycling equipment.
If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper indicated
level. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from all
surfaces. Refer to Recommended Fluids, Lubricants, and
Genuine Parts for correct fluid type.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 235
Front Suspension Ball Joints
Body Lubrication
The ball joints and seals should be inspected whenever
the vehicle is serviced for other reasons. Damaged seals
should be replaced to prevent leakage or contamination
of the grease.
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, doors,liftgate and hood hinges, should be
lubricated periodically to assure quiet, easy operation
and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to the appli-
cation of any lubricant, the parts concerned should be
wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after lubricating
excess oil and grease should be removed. Particular
attention should also be given to hood latching compo-
nents to insure proper function. When performing other
underhood services, the hood latch, release mechanism
and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.
Steering Linkage
Whenever the vehicle is hoisted, all steering linkage
joints should be inspected for evidence of damage. Dam-
aged seals should be replaced to prevent leakage or
contamination of the grease.
Drive Shaft Constant Velocity Joints — 4X4
Models
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
year, preferably in the fall and spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant such as Mopar Lock
Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
7
All four-wheel drive models are equipped with four
constant velocity joints. Periodic lubrication of these
joints is not required. However, the joint boot should be
inspected for external leakage or damage periodically. If
external leakage or damage is evident, the joint boot and
grease should be replaced immediately. Continued op-
eration could result in failure of the joint due to water
and dirt contamination of the grease. This would require
complete replacement of the joint assembly. Refer to the
Service Manual for the detailed replacement procedure.
Windshield Wiper Blades
The rubber edges of the wiper blades and the windshield
should be cleaned periodically with a sponge or soft cloth
and a mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accu-
mulations of salt or road film.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
236 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt
from a dry windshield.
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer solvents
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
must be exercised when filling or working around
the washer solution.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with
petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
After the engine has warmed, operate the defroster for a
few minutes to reduce the possibility of smearing or
freezing the fluid on the cold windshield. Mopar All
Weather Windshield Washer Solution used with water as
directed on the container, aids cleaning action, reduces
freezing point to avoid line clogging, and is not harmful
to paint or trim.
Windshield Washers
The fluid reservoir should be checked for fluid level at
regular intervals. When freezing weather is anticipated,
flush out the water in the reservoir by operating the
system. Fill the reservoir with windshield washer anti-
freeze (not radiator antifreeze), and operate the system
for a few seconds to flush out the residual water.
Exhaust System
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system
in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or
exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This
rating information can be found on most washer fluid
containers.
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 237
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the com-
plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
Cooling System
Inspection
Coolant protection checks should be made at every 12
months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
applicable). If coolant is dirty or rusty in appearance, the
system should be drained, flushed and refilled with fresh
coolant. Check face of radiator for any accumulation of
bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean the radiator core by gently
spraying water from a garden hose at the back of the core.
Check the reserve tank tubing for condition and tightness
of connection at reserve tank and radiator. Inspect the
entire system for leaks.
WARNING!
7
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO) which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing CO, fol-
low the preceding safety tips.
With the engine at normal operating temperature (but
not running), check the coolant pressure cap for proper
vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of coolant
from the radiator drain cock. If the cap is sealing prop-
erly, the coolant will begin to drain from the reserve tank.
Do not remove the pressure cap when the cooling system
is hot.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
238 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Disposal of Used Engine Coolant
WARNING!
Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant is a regulated
substance requiring proper disposal. Check with your
local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your
community. Do not store ethylene glycol-based engine
coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in
puddles on the ground. Prevent ingestion by animals and
children. If ingested by a child, contact a physician
immediately. Clean up any ground spills immediately.
You or others can be badly burned by hot coolant or
steam from your radiator. If you see or hear steam
coming from under the hood don’t open the hood
until the radiator has had time to cool. If you open
the hood and see steam or hot coolant escaping from
the radiator, don’t touch anything. Get away quickly.
Never try to open a pressure cap when the radiator is
hot.
Recommended Engine Coolant
Refer to Recommended Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine
Parts for correct fluid type.
Cooling System Maintenance
At the intervals shown on the Maintenance Schedules,
the system should be drained, flushed and filled.
Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill
If the solution is dirty and contains a considerable
amount of sediment, clean and flush with a reliable
cooling system cleaner. Follow with a thorough rinsing to
remove all deposits and chemicals. Discard old antifreeze
solution according to recommended procedure.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 239
used. Higher concentrations (not to exceed 65%) are
required if temperatures below –37°F (– 38°C) are antici-
pated.
CAUTION!
Mixing of coolants other than specified (non-
HOAT), may result in engine damage that may not
be covered under the new vehicle warranty, and
decreased corrosion protection. If a non-HOAT cool-
ant is introduced into the cooling system in an
emergency, it should be replaced with the specified
coolant as soon as possible.
Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionized
water when mixing the water/ antifreeze solution. The
use of lower quality water will reduce the amount of
corrosion protection in the engine cooling system.
Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to main-
tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac-
cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where
the vehicle is operated.
Do not use plain water alone or alcohol base anti-
freeze products. Do not use additional rust inhibi-
tors or antirust products, as they may not be compat-
ible with the radiator coolant and may plug the
radiator.
7
WARNING!
This vehicle has not been designed for use with
Propylene Glycol based coolants. Use of Propylene
Glycol based coolants is not recommended.
Never add coolant to the radiator when the engine is
overheated. Do not loosen or remove pressure cap to
cool overheated engine. The coolant is under pres-
sure and severe scalding could result.
Adding Coolant
When adding coolant or refilling system, a 50% solution
of ethylene glycol antifreeze coolant in water should be
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
240 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Coolant Pressure Cap
Coolant Level
The coolant pressure cap must be fully tightened to
prevent loss of coolant, and to insure that coolant will
return to the radiator from the coolant reserve tank.
The pressure cap should be inspected and cleaned if there
is any accumulation of foreign material on the sealing
surfaces.
WARNING!
The warning words “DO NOT OPEN HOT” on the
coolant pressure cap are a safety precaution. Heat
causes pressure to build up in the cooling system. To
prevent scalding or injury, do not remove the pres-
sure cap when the system is hot or under pressure.
The coolant reserve system provides a quick visual
method for determining that the coolant level is ad-
equate. With the engine idling, and warmed to normal
operating temperature, remove the cap from the over-
flow bottle, remove the dipstick and wipe the excess
coolant from it. Reinsert the dipstick and remove. Ob-
serve the dipstick checking the holes along the stem for
coolant. Check the coolant level whenever the hood is
raised.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 241
D. Maintain a minimum coolant concentration of 50%
ethylene glycol.
E. Make sure that the radiator and reserve tank overflow
hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
F. Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean also.
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is
no need to remove the pressure cap except when check-
ing coolant freeze point or when replacing coolant. Your
service attendant should be advised of this. When addi-
tional coolant is needed to maintain the proper level, it
should be added to the overflow bottle. Do not overfill.
G. The thermostat should not be changed for summer or
winter operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install
ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may
result in unsatisfactory cooling performance.
7
Points To Remember
Emission Related Components
A. Do not overfill the reserve tank (overflow bottle).
Fuel System Hoses And Vapor/Vacuum Harnesses
When the vehicle is serviced for scheduled maintenance,
inspect surface of hoses and nylon tubing for evidence of
heat and mechanical damage. Hard and brittle rubber,
cracking, checking, tears, cuts, abrasions, and excessive
swelling suggest deterioration of the rubber. Particular
attention should be given to examining hose surfaces
nearest to high heat sources, such as the exhaust mani-
fold.
B. Check coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the
reserve tank. If antifreeze needs to be added, contents of
reserve tank also must be protected against freezing.
C. If frequent coolant additions are required, or if the
level in the reserve tank does not drop when the engine
cools, the cooling system should be pressure tested for
leaks.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
242 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Insure nylon tubing in these areas has not melted or
collapsed.
PCV valve and passage with increasing mileage. Have
the PCV valve, hoses, and passages checked for proper
operation at the intervals specified. If the valve is
plugged or sticking, replace with a new valve. Do not
attempt to clean the oil PCV valve! Check ventilating
hose for indication of damage or plugging with deposits.
Replace if necessary.
Inspect all hose clamps and couplings to make sure they
are secure and no leaks are present.
NOTE: Fluids such as oil, power steering fluid, and
brake fluid are used during assembly plant operations to
ease the assembly of hoses to couplings. Therefore, oil
wetness at the hose-coupling area is not necessarily an
indication of leakage. Actual dripping of hot fluid when
systems are under pressure (during vehicle operation),
should be noted before hose is replaced based on leakage.
You are urged to use only manufacturer specified hoses
and clamps, or their equivalent in material and specifi-
cation, in any fuel system servicing. It is mandatory to
replace all clamps that have been loosened or removed
during service. Care should be taken in installing new
clamps to insure they are properly torqued.
Positive Crankcase Ventilation (PCV) Valve
Proper operation of the crankcase ventilation system
requires that the PCV valve be free of sticking or plug-
ging because of deposits. Deposits can accumulate in the
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 243
Brake System
pads wear. Brake fluid level should be checked when
pads are replaced. If the brake fluid level is abnormally
low, check system for leaks.
Power Disc Brakes (Front)
Disc brakes do not require adjustment; however, several
hard stops during the break-in period are recommended
to seat the linings and wear off any foreign material.
Self-Adjusting Rear Brakes
To maintain the correct adjustment, you need only drive
your vehicle in reverse and apply the brakes. If further
adjustment is needed, drive forward about 20 feet (6
meters) before you repeat the reverse application. To
avoid poor braking, brake pull, or damage to brake
drums, the brake linings should be inspected as specified
in the Maintenance Schedule.
7
Brake Master Cylinders
Refer to Recommended Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine
Parts for correct fluid type.
The fluid level in the master cylinders should be checked
whenever the vehicle is serviced, or immediately if the
brake system warning light is on. If necessary, add fluid
to bring level to the full mark on the side of the reservoir
of the brake master cylinder. Be sure to clean the top of
the master cylinder area before removing the cap. With
disc brakes, fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
244 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
CAUTION!
Use of brake fluid that may have a lower initial
boiling point, or is unidentified as to specifications,
may result in sudden brake failure during hard
prolonged braking. You could have an accident.
Do not allow a petroleum-base fluid to contaminate
the brake fluid. Seal damage may result.
Brake Linings
Your vehicle is equipped with self-adjusting brakes. A
few brake applications while moving in reverse will
maintain your brakes at the specified adjustment. Adjust-
ment will continue until the brake linings are worn. To
avoid brake failure, brake pull or damage to drums,
inspect the brake linings as specified. If excessively worn,
the brake linings must be replaced.
WARNING!
Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and the
brake fluid catching fire.
Brake Hoses
Use only brake fluid that has been in a tightly closed
container to avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture.
Inspection should be performed whenever the brake
system is serviced or at intervals specified. Inspect hy-
draulic brake hoses for surface cracking, scuffing or worn
spots. If there is any evidence of cracking, scuffing, or
worn spots, the hose should be replaced immediately!
Eventual deterioration of the hose can take place with
possible burst failure.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 245
NV-3500 5-Speed Transmission Lubricant Selection
These transmissions are filled with manual transmission
fluid at the factory. This fluid does not require periodic
changing. If it becomes necessary to add or change the
fluid in these transmissions, Refer to Recommended
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct fluid
type.
WARNING!
Worn brake hoses can burst and cause brake failure.
You could have an accident. If you see any sign of
cracking, scuffing, or worn spots, have the brake
hoses replaced immediately.
Clutch Hydraulic System
Automatic Transmission
The clutch hydraulic system is a sealed maintenance free
system. In the event of leakage or other malfunction, the
system must be replaced.
Fluid Level Check – 3.7/4.7L Engine
Check the fluid level while the transmission is at normal
operating temperature 180°F (82°C). This occurs after at
least 15 miles (25 km) of driving. At normal operating
temperature the fluid cannot be held comfortably be-
tween the fingertips.
Manual Transmission
7
Fluid Level Check
This fluid should be checked whenever other underhood
services are performed. The fluid level is checked by
removing the fill plug. If the level of the lubricant is more
than 1/ 4Љ (6.35 mm) below the bottom of the filler hole
while the vehicle is level, enough lubricant should be
added to bring the level to the bottom of the filler hole.
To check the automatic transmission fluid level properly,
the following procedure must be used:
1. Operate the engine at idle speed and normal operating
temperature.
2. The vehicle must be on level ground.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
246 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Fully apply the parking brake and press the brake
pedal.
both sides of the dipstick. If the fluid is low, add as
required into the dipstick tube. Do not overfill. After
adding any quantity of oil through the oil fill tube, wait
a minimum of two (2) minutes for the oil to fully drain
into the transmission before rechecking the fluid level.
4. Place the gear selector momentarily in each gear
position ending with the lever in P (Park).
NOTE: If it is necessary to check the transmission
below the operating temperature, the fluid level should
be between the two “COLD” (lower) holes on the dip-
stick with the fluid at approximately 70°F (21°C) (room
temperature). If the fluid level is correctly established at
room temperature, it should be between the “HOT”
(upper) reference holes when the transmission reaches
180°F ( 82°C). Remember it is best to check the level at the
normal operating temperature.
CAUTION!
5. Remove the dipstick, wipe it clean and reinsert it until
seated.
Be aware that if the fluid temperature is below 50°F
(10°C) it may not register on the dipstick. Do not add
fluid until the temperature is elevated enough to
produce an accurate reading.
6. Remove the dipstick again and note the fluid level on
both sides. The fluid level should be between the “HOT”
(upper) reference holes on the dipstick at normal operat-
ing temperature. Verify that solid coating of oil is seen on
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 247
7. Check for leaks. Release parking brake.
CAUTION!
To prevent dirt and water from entering the transmission
after checking or replenishing fluid, make certain that the
dipstick cap is properly reseated. It is normal for the
dipstick cap to spring back slightly from its fully seated
position, as long as its seal remains engaged in the
dipstick tube.
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufac-
turers recommended fluid may cause deterioration
in transmission shift quality and/or torque converter
shudder. Using a transmission fluid other than the
manufacturers recommended fluid will result in
more frequent fluid and filter changes. Refer to
Recommended Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts
for correct fluid type.
Automatic Transmission Fluid And Filter Change
To obtain best performance and long life for automatic
transmissions, the manufacturer recommends that they
be given regular maintenance service by an Authorized
Dodge Dealer or Service Center. It is important that the
transmission be adjusted periodically, the fluid be main-
tained at the correct level, and that it be drained and
refilled as specified.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedules” section for the
proper service intervals for your type of driving.
7
If the transmission is disassembled for any reason, the
fluid and filter should be changed, and the bands ad-
justed (if equipped).
It is important that proper lubricant is used in the
transmission. Refer to Recommended Fluids, Lubricants
and Genuine Parts for correct fluid type. It is important
that the transmission fluid be maintained at the pre-
scribed level using the recommended fluid.
Special Additives
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the ad-
dition of any fluid additives to the transmission. Excep-
tion to this policy is the use of special dyes to aid in
detecting fluid leaks. The use of transmission sealers
should be avoided, since they may adversely affect seals.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
248 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Transfer Case
encountered in some off-highway types of service, will
require draining and refilling the axle to avoid damage.
Inspect the transfer case for fluid leaks. If a fluid leak is
evident the transfer case fluid level can be checked by
removing the filler plug located on the back side of the
transfer case. The fluid level should be at the bottom edge
of the filler plug hole when the vehicle is in a level
position.
Rear Axle
Limited-slip differentials require the use of Mopar lim-
ited slip additive. Refer to Recommended Fluids, Lubri-
cants and Genuine Parts for correct fluid type. This
should be added to the gear lubricant whenever a fluid
change is made, when equipped with a limited-slip
differential. Rear axle fluid level should be 1/ 4Љ (6.35
mm) below filler plug hole for 8 1/ 4 axles and should be
5/ 8Љ (16 mm) below filler plug hole for 9 1/ 4Љ axles.
The transfer case fluid should be drained and refilled at
the intervals specified.
Lubricant Selection
Refer to Recommended Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine
Parts for correct fluid type.
Front Axle
Front axle fluid level should be at the bottom of the filler
plug hole.
Axles
Refer to Recommended Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine
Parts for correct fluid type.
Selection of Lubricating Grease
The National Lubricating Grease Institute (NLGI) has
developed a symbol (Certification Mark) to aid the
vehicle owner in the proper selection of grease for chassis
components. This symbol, an example shown below, is
located on the grease container and identifies the appli-
cation and quality of the grease.
The manufacturer does not recommend regularly sched-
uled oil changes for axles in vehicles whose operation is
classified as normal truck service.
NOTE: The presence of water in the gear lubricant will
result in corrosion and possible failure of differential
components. Operation of the vehicle in water, as may be
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 249
There are two groups
identified, those for wheel
bearings (Letter “G”) and
those for chassis (Letter
“L”) lubrication. Perfor-
which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants,
road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme
hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will
have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and under-
body protection.
mance categories within
these groups result in dual
letter designations for
each group. The letter des-
The following maintenance recommendations will enable
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
resistance built into your vehicle.
ignations shown in the ex-
What Causes Corrosion?
ample are the highest
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
quality level available and when combined as shown can
be used for chassis lubrication. Use only those greases
that have the NLGI symbol on the container along with
the proper quality level for your application.
The most common causes are:
7
•
•
•
•
•
Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
Stone and gravel impact.
Appearance Care and Protection from Corrosion
Protection of Body and Paint from Corrosion
Insects, tree sap and tar.
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo-
graphic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
passable in snow and ice, and those that are sprayed on
trees and road surfaces during other seasons, are highly
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking,
Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
Atmospheric fallout/ industrial pollutants.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
250 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Washing
Special Care
•
Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your ve-
hicle in the shade using a mild car wash soap, and
rinse the panels completely with clear water.
•
•
•
•
If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once
a month.
•
•
If insects, tar or other similar deposits have accumu-
lated on your vehicle, wash it as soon as possible.
It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges
of the doors, rocker panels and tailgate be kept clear
and open.
Use Mopar auto polish to remove road film and stains
and to polish your vehicle. Take care never to scratch
the paint.
If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
considered the responsibility of the owner.
•
Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint
finish.
If your vehicle is damaged due to an accident or
similar cause which destroys the paint and protective
coating have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible.
The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibil-
ity of the owner.
CAUTION!
Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials
such as steel wool or scouring powder, which will
scratch metal and painted surfaces.
•
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome plated wheels should be cleaned regularly
with mild soap and water to prevent corrosion. To
remove heavy soil, select a nonabrasive, non-acidic
cleaner. Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle
brush or metal polishes. Only Mopar cleaners are
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 251
recommended. Do not use oven cleaner. Avoid auto-
matic car washes that use acidic solutions or harsh
brushes that may damage the wheels’ protective fin-
ish.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt
can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery
and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth.
Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth
and Mopar Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid
soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid. Please
do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, deter-
gents, or ammonia based cleaners to clean your leather
upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is not
required to maintain the original condition.
•
If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well
packaged and sealed.
•
•
If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
Use Mopar touch up paint on scratches as soon as
possible. Your dealer has touch up paint to match the
color of your vehicle.
WARNING!
7
Interior Care
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in
closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.
Use Mopar Fabric Cleaner to clean fabric upholstery and
carpeting.
Use Mopar Vinyl Cleaner to clean vinyl upholstery and
trim.
Glass Surfaces
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
with any commercial household-type glass cleaner.
Never use an abrasive type cleaner. Use caution when
cleaning inside rear windows equipped with electric
Mopar Total Clean is specifically recommended for
leather upholstery.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
252 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
defrosters or windshields equipped with a windshield
wiper de-icer. Do not use scrapers or other sharp instru-
ments which may scratch the elements.
If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or
lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the car to
wash them.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the
towel or rag that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
directly on the mirror.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
buckles do not work properly.
POWER DISTRIBUTION CENTER
Your vehicle is equipped with an electrical Power Distri-
bution Center located in the engine compartment near
the battery.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
1. Clean with a wet soft rag. A mild soap solution may be
used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp
rag.
2. Dry with a soft tissue.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
Sun damage will also weaken the fabric.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 253
This power center houses plug-in cartridge and relays. A
label inside the latching cover of the center identifies each
component for ease of replacement, if necessary. Car-
tridge fuses and relays can be obtained from your Dodge
dealer.
FUSE BLOCK
The fuse block contains blade-type mini-fuses, relays,
and circuit breakers for high-current circuits. It is located
just inboard of the left end of the instrument panel,
behind the panel surface. It is accessible through a
snap-in cover. Refer to the label on the backside of the
fuse block cover for the proper fuse amperage and
position.
CAUTION!
7
When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use
only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The
use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may
result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If a
properly rated fuse continues to blow, it suggests a
problem in the circuit that must be corrected.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
254 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for
longer than 21 days, you may want to take steps to
protect your battery. You may do this by disconnecting
the battery or by disconnecting the ignition-off draw
(I.O.D.) fuse in cavity #12. The I.O.D. cavity includes a
snap-in retainer that allows the fuse to be disconnected,
without removing it from the fuse block. Pressing the
I.O.D. fuse back into the cavity reconnects it.
REPLACEMENT LIGHT BULBS
LIGHT BULBS — Inside
Bulb No.
A/ C Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Ash Tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Brake System Warning Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Dome Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 579
EGR Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Glove Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Heater Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Instrument Cluster. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Low Fuel Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Low Washer Fluid Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Oil Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Overhead Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 578
Seat Belt Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Switched Dome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 578
Temperature Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Underhood Light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 561
4x4 Shift Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
VEHICLE STORAGE
If you are storing your vehicle for more than 21 days, we
recommend that you take the following steps to mini-
mize the drain on your vehicle’s battery:
•
Disconnect the Ignition-Off Draw fuse (I.O.D.) fuse
located in cavity #12 of the fuse block. The I.O.D.
cavity includes a snap-in retainer that allows the fuse
to be disconnected, without removing it from the fuse
block.
•
•
The transfer case should be placed in the 4HI mode
and kept in this position to minimize the battery drain.
As an alternative to the above steps you may discon-
nect the negative cable from the battery.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 255
BULB REPLACEMENT
Headlights
LIGHT BULBS — Outside
Bulb No.
Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9007LL
Back-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3157
Center High Mounted Stoplight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 921
Fog Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 881L
Front Sidemarker. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
License Plate Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Park & Turn Signal (2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3157
Tail, Stop, & Sidemarker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3157
Cargo (2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 921
7
1. Open the hood.
2. Remove the screw as shown and pull the parking/
turn signal housing out.
3. Disconnect connectors from the parking/ turn signal
lamp.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
256 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
4. Remove the bolts attaching the headlamp to the inner
fender panel.
5. Grasp the headlamp and pull firmly to disengage it
from the panel.
6. Disconnect all connectors and separate the headlamp
module from the vehicle
7. Remove the retaining ring holding the bulb to the
headlamp.
8. Pull the bulb socket from the headlamp and pull the
bulb from the socket.
2. Turn the bulb and socket assembly 1/ 4 turn and pull
to remove socket from housing.
NOTE: These are Halogen bulbs. Take care not to touch
the bulb with your fingers.
3. The bulb can be removed from the socket by pulling
straight out.
Parking/Turn Signal Lights
NOTE: Body oils from your fingers could cause exces-
sive heat buildup which reduces bulb life.
1. Remove the screw as shown and pull the parking/
turn signal housing out.
Rear Side Marker, Tail Lights, Turn Signals And
Backup Lights — Replacement
1. Remove the screws as illustrated. Grasp the tail light
housing and pull it rearward.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 257
Center High-Mounted Stoplight
1. Remove two screws securing the stoplight housing
assembly to the roof.
2. Rotate the bulb and socket assembly 1/ 4 turn and pull
it from housing.
7
3. The bulb can be removed from the sockets by pulling
it straight out.
2. Turn the bulb and socket assembly 1/ 4 counterclock-
wise and free it from the housing.
License Lights
3. Pull the bulb straight from socket to remove it.
1. Rotate the socket 1/ 4 turn counterclockwise.
2. Pull the bulb from socket.
Fog Lights
1. Rotate the bulb and connector 1/ 4 turn counterclock-
wise.
2. Pull the bulb off of connector.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
258 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FLUIDS AND CAPACITIES
U.S.
Metric
Fuel
20 Gal. w/ ORVR, 22 Gal.
w/ o ORVR
76L w/ ORVR, 83L w/ o
ORVR
Regular/ Club Cab, 87 Octane
Quad Cab, 87 Octane
Engine Oil (with filter)
24 Gal.
91L
3.7L, SAE 5W-30, API Certified
4.7L, SAE 5W-30, API Certified
5 Qt.
6 Qt.
4.7L
5.7L
Cooling System
3.7L (Mopar Antifreeze/ Coolant 5 Year/ 100,000 Mile
NA
NA
16L
Formula)
4.7L (Mopar Antifreeze/ Coolant 5 Year/ 100,000 Mile
17 Qt.
Formula)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 259
RECOMMENDED FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine
Component
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts
Engine Coolant
Mopar Antifreeze/ Coolant 5 Year/ 100,000 Mile Formula HOAT (Hybrid Or-
ganic Additive Technology) P/ N 5011764AB or equivalent.
Engine Oil
Use SAE 5W-30, API Certified, meeting material standard MS-6395.
Engine Oil Filter
Spark Plugs
Mopar Engine Oil Filter, P/ N 5281090 or equivalent.
Refer to the Vehicle Emission Control Information label in the engine com-
partment.
Fuel Selection
87 Octane, (R+M)/ 2 Method
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
260 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Chassis
Component
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts.
Automatic Transmission
Manual Transmission (NV 3500)
Transfer Case
Mopar ATF+4, Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Mopar Manual Transmission Fluid, part number 4874464
Mopar ATF+4, Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Front and Rear Axles
SAE 75W-90 Multipurpose Type, GL-5 Gear Lubricant. Limited-Slip Rear
Axles Require Mopar limited slip additive. Four (4) ounces (118 ml)
should be added to the gear lubricant whenever a fluid change is made.
Rear Axle Fluid for Trailer Towing
Brake Master Cylinder
For all trailer towing or heavy duty applications, replace the factory fill
rear axle fluid with Mopar Synthetic Gear Lubricant SAE 75W-140 (MS-
8985)
Mopar DOT 3 and SAE J1703 should be used. If DOT 3 brake fluid is not
available, then DOT 4. Use only recommended brake fluids.
Power Steering Reservoir
Steering Linkage
Ball Joints
Mopar ATF+4, Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Mopar Multi-Mileage Lubricant 5
Mopar Multi-Mileage Lubricant 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
CONTENTS
Ⅵ Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . . . 262
Ⅵ Emissions Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Ⅵ Maintenance Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
▫ Schedule “B” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
▫ Schedule “A” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
M
A
I
262 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
The “Scheduled” maintenance services, listed in bold
type on the following pages must be done at the times or
mileages specified to assure the continued proper func-
tioning of the emission control system. These, and all
other maintenance services included in this manual,
should be done to provide best vehicle performance and
reliability. More frequent maintenance may be needed for
vehicles in severe operating conditions such as dusty
areas and very short trip driving.
EMISSIONS TESTING
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
In some localities, it may be or will become a legal
requirement to ensure that all emissions components and
systems are functioning properly as a part of the test
procedure. The test center accomplishes this by checking
the On Board Diagnostic System (OBD) system with an
electronic scan tool. If your vehicle has recently been
serviced, the OBD system may have been reset to a Љnot
readyЉ condition because the OBD system has not had
sufficient time since the servicing to reconfirm that
emissions components are operating properly. In most
cases, a reasonable mix and amount of normal city and
highway driving and at least one overnight-off period
will be required to prepare your vehicle for this check;
however your dealer has the equipment and procedures
required to make certain that the OBD system of your
vehicle is ready for the required testing.
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
Inspection and service also should be done any time a
malfunction is suspected.
E
S
NOTE: Maintenance, replacement, or repair of the
emission control devices and systems on your vehicle
may be performed by any automotive repair establish-
ment or individual using any automotive part which has
been certified pursuant to U.S. EPA or, in the State of
California, California Air Resources Board regulations.
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
M
A
I
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 263
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
There are two maintenance schedules that show the
required service for your vehicle.
•
If equipped for and operating with E-85 (ethanol)
fuel.
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
NOTE: If ANY of these apply to you then change your
engine oil every 3,000 miles (5 000 km) or 3 months,
whichever comes first and follow schedule “B” of the
ЉMaintenance SchedulesЉ section of this manual.
First is Schedule “B”. It is for vehicles that are operated
under the conditions that are listed below and at the
beginning of the schedule.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Day or night temperatures are below 32° F (0° C).
Stop and go driving.
NOTE: Most vehicles are operated under the conditions
listed for Schedule ЉBЉ.
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
Second is Schedule “A”. It is for vehicles that are not
operated under any of the conditions listed under Sched-
ule ЉBЉ.
Extensive engine idling.
Driving in dusty conditions.
E
S
Short trips of less than 10 miles (16 km).
Use the schedule that best describes your driving condi-
tions. Where time and mileage are listed, follow the
interval that occurs first.
8
More than 50% of your driving is at sustained high
speeds during hot weather, above 90° F32 (° C).
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change
intervals exceed 6,000 miles (10 000 km) or 6 months
whichever comes first.
•
•
•
•
Trailer towing.
Heavy Loading.
Taxi, police, or delivery service (commercial service).
Off-road or desert operation.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
M
A
I
264 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
•
Check all lights and all other electrical items for correct
operation.
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
CAUTION!
Failure to perform the required maintenance items
may result in damage to the vehicle.
At Each Oil Change
•
•
•
•
Change the engine oil filter.
Inspect the exhaust system.
Inspect the brake hoses.
At Each Stop for Fuel
•
Check the engine oil level about 5 minutes after a fully
warmed engine is shut off. Checking the oil level while
the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accu-
racy of the oil level reading. Add oil only when the
level is at or below the ADD or MIN mark.
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
Inspect the CV joints (if equipped) and front suspen-
sion components.
•
•
•
Check the automatic transmission fluid level (if
equipped).
E
S
•
Check the windshield washer solvent and add if
required.
Check the manual transmission fluid level (if
equipped).
8
Once a Month
Check the coolant level, hoses, and clamps.
•
•
•
Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or
damage.
Tire Rotation
•
Rotate the tires every 6,000 miles (10 000 km).
Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the terminals
as required.
Check the fluid levels of coolant reservoir, brake
master cylinder, and transmission and add as needed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
M
A
I
SCHEDULE “B” 265
Schedule “B”
Follow schedule “B” if you usually operate your vehicle
under one or more of the following conditions.
•
•
•
•
•
Trailer towing.
Heavy Loading.
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
Taxi, police, or delivery service (commercial service).
Off-road or desert operation.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Day or night temperatures are below 32° F ( 0° C).
Stop and go driving.
If equipped for and operating with E-85 (ethanol)
fuel.
Extensive engine idling.
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
Driving in dusty conditions.
NOTE: If ANY of these apply to you then change your
engine oil every 3,000 miles (5 000 km) or 3 months,
whichever comes first and follow schedule “B” of the
ЉMaintenance SchedulesЉ section of this manual.
Short trips of less than 10 miles (16 km).
More than 50% of your driving is at sustained high
speeds during hot weather, above 90° F (32° C).
E
S
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
M
A
I
266 SCHEDULE “B”
Miles
3,000
(5 000)
X
6,000
(10 000)
X
9,000
(14 000)
X
12,000
15,000
(24 000)
X
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
(Kilometers)
(19 000)
Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
Change rear axle fluid.
Change front axle fluid (4X4).
Inspect brake linings.
X
X
X
X
Inspect engine air cleaner filter, replace if neces-
sary.
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
X
E
S
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
M
A
I
SCHEDULE “B” 267
Miles
18,000
(29 000)
X
21,000
(34 000)
X
24,000
27,000
30,000
(48 000)
X
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
(Kilometers)
(38 000)
(43 000)
Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
Change rear axle fluid.
Change front axle fluid (4X4).
Check transfer case fluid level (4X4).
Inspect brake linings.
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
Inspect engine air cleaner filter, replace if neces-
sary.
Replace spark plugs.
X
X
X
Inspect PCV valve, replace as necessary.*
Drain and refill automatic transmission fluid and
change main sump filter (4.7L).
E
S
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
M
A
I
268 SCHEDULE “B”
Miles
33,000
(53 000)
X
36,000
39, 000
(62 000)
X
42,000
(67 000)
X
45,000
(72 000)
X
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
(Kilometers)
(58 000)
Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
Change rear axle fluid.
Change front axle fluid (4X4).
Inspect brake linings.
X
X
X
X
Inspect engine air cleaner filter, replace if neces-
sary.
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
X
E
S
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
M
A
I
SCHEDULE “B” 269
Miles
48,000
51,000
(82 000)
X
54,000
(86 000)
X
57,000
60,000
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
(Kilometers)
(77 000)
(91 000)
(96 000)
Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
Change rear axle fluid.
Change front axle fluid (4X4).
Inspect brake linings.
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Inspect engine air cleaner filter, replace if neces-
sary.
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
X
Replace spark plugs.
X
X
X
Inspect PCV valve, replace as necessary.*
Inspect auto tension drive belt and replace if re-
quired.
E
S
Drain and refill transfer case (4X4).
X
X
Drain and refill automatic transmission fluid,
change filter (3.7L). This applies only if your ve-
hicle is used for police, taxi, fleet, heavy loading, or
trailer towing.
8
Drain and refill automatic transmission fluid and
change main sump filter (4.7L).
X
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
M
A
I
270 SCHEDULE “B”
Miles
63,000
(101 000)
X
66,000
(106 000)
X
69,000
(110 000)
X
72,000
75,000
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
(Kilometers)
(115 000)
(120 000)
Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
Change rear axle fluid.
X
X
X
X
Change front axle fluid (4X4).
Inspect brake linings.
Inspect engine air cleaner filter, replace if necessary.
Inspect auto tension drive belt, replace if required.
X
X
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
M
A
I
SCHEDULE “B” 271
Miles
78,000
(125 000)
X
81,000
(130 000)
X
84,000
87,000
90,000
(144 000)
X
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
(Kilometers)
(134 000)
(139 000)
Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
Change rear axle fluid.
Change front axle fluid (4X4).
Check transfer case fluid level (4X4).
Inspect brake linings.
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
Inspect engine air cleaner filter, replace if neces-
sary.
Replace spark plugs.
X
X
X
Inspect PCV valve, replace as necessary.*
Inspect auto tension drive belt and replace if re-
quired.
E
S
Drain and refill automatic transmission fluid and
change main sump and cooler return filter (if
equipped) (4.7L).
X
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
M
A
I
272 SCHEDULE “B”
Miles
93,000
(149 000)
X
96,000
(154 000)
X
99,000
(158 000)
X
100,000
102,000
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
(Kilometers)
(160 000)
(163 000)
Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
Flush and replace engine coolant.
Change rear axle fluid.
Change front axle fluid (4X4).
Inspect brake linings.
X
X
X
X
X
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
M
A
I
SCHEDULE “B” 273
Miles
105,000
108,000
111,000
114,000
117,000 120,000
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
(Kilometers)
(168 000) (173 000) (178 000) (182 000) (187 000) (192 000)
Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
Change rear axle fluid.
Change front axle fluid (4X4).
Inspect brake linings.
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Inspect engine air cleaner filter, replace if
necessary.
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
X
X
X
Replace spark plugs.
X
X
X
Inspect PCV valve, replace as necessary.*
Inspect auto tension drive belt and replace if
required.
E
S
Drain and refill transfer case fluid (4X4).
X
X
Drain and refill automatic transmission fluid,
change filter (3.7L). This applies only if your
vehicle is used for police, taxi, fleet, heavy
loading, or trailer towing.
8
Drain and refill automatic transmission fluid
and change main sump filter (4.7L).
X
* This maintenance is recommended by the manufacture
to the owner but is not required to maintain the emis-
sions warranty.
‡ This maintenance is not required if previously replaced.
Inspection and service should also be performed anytime a
malfunction is observed or suspected. Retain all receipts.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
M
A
I
274 SCHEDULE “A”
Schedule “A”
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
Miles
6,000
(10 000)
[6]
12,000
(19 000)
[12]
18,000
(29 000)
[18]
24,000
(38 000)
[24]
30,000
(48 000)
[30]
(Kilometers)
[Months]
Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
Check transfer case fluid level (4X4).
Inspect brake linings.
Replace engine air cleaner filter.
Replace spark plugs.
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
X
X
E
S
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
M
A
I
SCHEDULE “A” 275
Miles
36,000
(58 000)
[36]
42,000
(67 000)
[42]
48,000
54,000
60,000
66,000
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
(Kilometers)
(77 000) (84 000) (96 000) (106 000)
[Months]
[48]
[54]
[60]
[66]
Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
X
X
X
X
X
X
Flush and replace engine coolant at 60
months, regardless of mileage.
X
X
Check transfer case fluid level (4X4).
Inspect brake linings.
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
X
X
Replace engine air cleaner filter.
Replace spark plugs.
X
X
X
Inspect PCV valve, replace as necessary.*
Inspect auto tension drive belt and replace if
required.
E
S
X
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
M
A
I
276 SCHEDULE “A”
Miles
72,000
78,000
84,000
90,000
96,000
100,000
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
(Kilometers)
(115 000) (125 000) (134 000) (144000) (154 000) (160 000)
[Months]
[72]
[78]
[84]
[90]
X
[96]
Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
Check transfer case fluid Level (4X4).
Inspect brake linings.
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Replace engine air cleaner filter.
Replace spark plugs.
X
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
X
Inspect PCV valve, replace as necessary.*
X
Inspect auto tension drive belt and replace if
required.‡
X
Drain and refill automatic transmission fluid
and change main sump and cooler return fil-
ter (if equipped) (4.7L).
E
S
X
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
M
A
I
SCHEDULE “A” 277
Miles
102,000
(163 000)
[102]
108,000
(173 000)
[108]
114,000
120,000
(192 000)
[120]
X
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
(Kilometers)
(182 000)
[114]
X
[Months]
Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
Drain and refill transfer case fluid (4X4).
Flush and replace engine coolant, if not done at 60 mos.
Inspect brake linings.
X
X
X
X
X
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
Replace engine air cleaner filter.
Replace spark plugs.
X
X
X
X
Inspect PCV valve, replace if necessary.*
Inspect auto tension drive belt and replace if required.‡
E
S
* This maintenance is recommended by the manufacture
to the owner but is not required to maintain the emis-
sions warranty.
WARNING!
8
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only that service work for which
you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent me-
chanic.
‡ This maintenance is not required if previously replaced.
Inspection and service should also be performed anytime
a malfunction is observed or suspected. Retain all re-
ceipts.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
Ⅵ Suggestions For Obtaining Service For Your
Ⅵ Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Ⅵ Mopar Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Ⅵ Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
▫ In Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Ⅵ Publication Order Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
▫ Prepare For The Appointment . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
▫ Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Ⅵ If You Need Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
280 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it is advisable
to make these arrangements when you call for an ap-
pointment.
Prepare For The Appointment
If you’re having warranty work done, be sure to have the
right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All
work to be performed may not be covered by the
warranty, discuss additional charges with the service
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s
service history. This can often provide a clue to the
current problem.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer and its dealers are vitally interested in
your satisfaction. We want you to be happy with our
products and services.
Your selling dealer is best equipped and most anxious to
provide prompt resolution for any warranty issue or
related matter that you may experience. The manufactur-
er’s dealers have the facilities, factory-trained techni-
cians, special tools, and the latest information to assure
your vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely manner.
The manufacturer has empowered its dealers to make
warranty and repair decisions that ensure you are not
inconvenienced. There is no need for you to wait for a
decision from the manufacturer. If a special circumstance
occurs that requires information from the manufacturer,
we have asked the dealer’s service management to make
the contact on your behalf.
Prepare A List
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident,
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the
service advisor know.
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items, and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
At many dealers you may obtain a rental vehicle at a
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 281
This is why you should always talk to your dealer’s
service manager first. Most matters can be resolved with
this process.
DaimlerChrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone —(800) 465–2001
•
If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the
general manager or owner of the dealership. They
want to know if you need assistance.
In Mexico contact:
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
In Mexico (915) 729–1248 or 729–1240
Outside Mexico (525) 729–1248 or 729–1240
•
If your dealership is unable to resolve the concern, you
may contact the Manufacturer’s Customer Center.
Any communication to the Manufacturer’s Customer
Center should include the following information:
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
•
•
•
•
•
Owner’s name and address
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommuni-
cation Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its Customer
Center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer who
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
(TTY) in the United States can communicate with the
manufacturer by dialing 1–800–380–CHRY.
Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
Dealership name
9
Vehicle identification number
Vehicle delivery date and mileage
DaimlerChrysler Motors Corporation Customer Center
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (800) 992-1997
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
282 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Service Contract
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased your new vehicle. Your dealer has
also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
your ownership experience. You’ll be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
concerns.
You may have purchased a service contract for your
vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unex-
pected repairs after your manufacturer’s new vehicle
limited warranty expires. The manufacturer stands be-
hind only the manufacturer’s Service Contracts. If you
purchased a manufacturer’s Service Contract, you will
receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card
in the mail within three weeks of your vehicle delivery
date. If you have any questions about your service
contract, call the manufacturer’s Service Contract Na-
tional Customer Hotline at 1-800-521-9922.
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See your manufacturer’s Warranty Information Booklet
for information on warranty coverage and transfer of
warranty.
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service
contract that is not the manufacturer’s Service Contract. It
is not responsible for any service contract other than the
manufacturer’s Service Contract. If you purchased a
service contract that is not a manufacturer’s Service
Contract, and you require service after your manufactur-
er’s new vehicle limited warranty expires, please refer to
your contract documents, and contact the person listed in
those documents.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 283
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
284 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
MOPARா PARTS
Transportation, Washington DC 20590. You can also
obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from
the Hotline.
Mopar fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are
available from your dealer. They will help you keep your
vehicle operating at its best.
In Canada:
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
should contact the Customer Service Department imme-
diately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
defect to the Canadian government should write to
Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations
and Recalls, 2780 Sheffield Road, Ottawa, Ontario K1B
3V9.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
In the 50 United States and Washington D.C.: If you
believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause
a crash or cause injury or death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administra-
tion (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the manufacturer.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your dealer, and the
manufacturer.
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mas-
tercard, American Express, and Discover orders are ac-
cepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call
for an order form.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll free at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 in Wash-
ington DC area) or write to: NHTSA, U.S. Dept. of
NOTE: A street address is required when ordering
manuals. (No P.O. Boxes).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 285
•
•
Service Manuals.
•
Owner’s Manuals.
These comprehensive service manuals provide the
information that students and professional technicians
need in diagnosing/ troubleshooting, problem solving,
maintaining, servicing and repairing DaimlerChrysler
Corporation vehicles. A complete working knowledge
of the vehicle, system and/ or components is written in
straightforward language with illustrations, diagrams
and charts.
These manuals have been prepared with the assistance
of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you
with specific Chrysler group vehicles. Included are
starting, operating, emergency and maintenance pro-
cedures as well as specifications, capabilities and
safety tips.
Call Toll Free at 1–800–890–4038 (U.S.) or 1–800–387–1143
(Canada)
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals.
Or
Filled with diagrams, charts and detailed illustrations,
these practical manuals make it easy for students and
technicians to find and fix problems on computer-
controlled vehicle systems and features. They show
exactly how to find and correct problems the first time,
using step-by-step troubleshooting and driveability
procedures, proven diagnostic tests and a complete list
of all tools and equipment.
Visit us on the World Wide Web at:
www.techauthority.daimlerchrysler.com or
www.daimlerchrysler.ca/manuals
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INDEX
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
288 INDEX
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . 239
Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186,208
Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips . . . . . . . . 135,137
Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Air Conditioning System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Air Pressure, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176,182
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31,34,102
Airbag Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Airbag On/ Off Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21,102
Alarm, Panic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Alignment and Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Alterations/ Modifications, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . 238,258
Anti-Lock Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164,165
Anti-Lock Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Anti-Theft System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21,102
Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Automatic Dimming Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . 144,146,245
Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Fluid and Filter Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247,260
Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Overdrive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Special Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Torque Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Axle Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Axle Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Backfire, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Ball Joints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Emergency Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Keyless Transmitter Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 21
Saving Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Belts, Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Belts, Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INDEX 289
Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164,243
Anti-Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164,165
Disc Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Self-Adjusting Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Brake/ Transmission Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Break-In Recommendations, New Vehicle . . . . . . 52
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Bulbs, Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Cargo Area Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Cargo Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70,102
Cassette Tape and Player Maintenance . . . . . . . 131
Cassette Tape Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106,119,121
Catalytic Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189,231
CD Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113,117,122
CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110,114,116,124,126
Cellular Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Center High Mounted Stop Light . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Center Lap Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Center Seat Storage Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Changing A Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Chart, Tire Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38,39,52
Child Restraint Tether Anchors . . . . . . . . . . . 42,46
Child Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Child Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Club Cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24,64
Camper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Capacity, Cargo Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Caps, Filler
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Car Washes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91,189
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
290 INDEX
Compact Disc Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Compact Disc Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106,110
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Compass Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79,80
Computer, Trip/ Travel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Console, Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Console, Overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Converter, Catalytic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Coolant Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237,240
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Coolant Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Disposal of Used Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Drain, Flush, and Refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Points to Remember . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Radiator Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Selection of Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238,258,259
Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Cruise Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Cup Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Defroster, Rear Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54,133,136
Delay Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Diagnostic System, Onboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Differential, Limited-Slip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Dipsticks
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Disabled Vehicle Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Disc Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Disposal
Used Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13,14
Door Opener, Garage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INDEX 291
Downshifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Drive Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Drive Shaft Universal Joints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53,189
Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Flooded, Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226,258,259
Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Oil Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Entry System, Illuminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Equipment Identification Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53,237
Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53,236
Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Electrical Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Electronic Power Distribution Center . . . . . . . . 252
Electronic Speed Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Emergency, In Case of
Freeing Vehicle When Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . . . . 262
Emission Related Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Engine
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221,222
Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238,259
Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Filters
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Engine Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229,259
Engine Oil Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Flashers
10
Hazard Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
292 INDEX
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Flat Tire Stowage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Flooded Engine Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Floor Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Fluid, Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Fluid Level Checks
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Materials Added . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Octane Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184,258
System Hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Tank Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69,257
Four Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Four-Way Hazard Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Front Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Garage Door Opener . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Gasoline, Reformulated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Gauges
Coolant Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100,147
Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
GVWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INDEX 293
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Dimmer Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
High Beam/ Low Beam Select Switch . . . . . . . 71
Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Heater, Engine Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
High Beam/ Low Beam Select Switch . . . . . . . . . 71
Hitches
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Holder, Cup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Homelink Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Inflation Pressure Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Inside Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97,99
Instrument Panel and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Intermittent Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Jack Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Key, Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Key, Sentry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Key-In Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Keyless Entry System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Knee Bolster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9,11
Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Infant Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38,39
10
Lane Change and Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . 70,99
Lap Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
294 INDEX
Lap/ Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
LATCH
License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Low Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Low Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Malfunction Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254,255
Transmission Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70,256
Upshift Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99,151
Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) . . . . 99
Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Limited-Slip Differential . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Loading Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191,194
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Child Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
(Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren) . . . . 42
Lead Free Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54,67
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38,102
Anti-Lock Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Back-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Center Mounted Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Check Gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Courtesy/ Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Cruise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Daytime Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69,257
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97,99
Intensity Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67,76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INDEX 295
Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren
Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Modifications/ Alterations, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Mopar Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225,284
Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
(LATCH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Lubricating Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Lug Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Lumbar Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
New Vehicle Break-In Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Maintenance Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Schedule ЉAЉ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Schedule ЉBЉ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Malfunction Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 103,224
Manual, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144,150,245
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Lubricant Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245,260
Shift Speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Electric Powered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226,259
Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229,259
Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Identification Logo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Materials Added to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Pressure Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228,258
Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
296 INDEX
Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228,258
Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . . . 223,224
Opener, Garage Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Outside Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Overdrive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Overhead Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76,77
Overhead Travel Information Center . . . . . . . . . 77
Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104,239
Owner’s Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166,234
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Pregnant Women and Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Pressure Gauge, Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Programmable Electronic Features . . . . . . . . . 82,85
Programming Transmitters . . . . . . . . . . . . 19,82,85
Quad Cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Parking On Hill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Passenger Airbag On/ Off Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Passing Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Pickup Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Placard, Tire and Loading Information . . . . . . . 172
Positive Crankcase Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Power
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Distribution Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Radiator Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106,114,119,124
Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114,119,132
Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Reclining Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Recommended Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine
Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Recreational Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Shifting into Transfer Case Neutral (N) . . . . . 202
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INDEX 297
Shifting out of Transfer Case Neutral (N) . . . 204
Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Release, Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Remote Keyless Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Remote Sound System Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38,45
Restraints, Occupant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Rocking Vehicle When Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183,264
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Bench . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Easy Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Lumbar Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Reclining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21,102
Selection of Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Selection of Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Self-Adjusting Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Sentry Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Service and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262,263
Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Setting the Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Shift Speeds, Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . 151
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Schedule, Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Seat Belt Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24,25
And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38,52
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
298 INDEX
Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Transfer Case, Shifting into Transfer
Case Neutral (N) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Transfer Case, Shifting out of Transfer
Linkage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166,234
Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System
Case Neutral (N) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Shoulder Belt Upper Anchorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Signals, Turn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70,99,256
Sliding Rear Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Snow Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Snow Plow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Specifications
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Speed Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Emergency (Jump Starting) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Engine Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Steering
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Storage Compartment, Center Seat . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Storage, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Stuck, Freeing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Supplemental Tire Pressure Information . . . . . . 182
Synthetic Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Taillights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Tape Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . 99
Tether Anchor, Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Thermostat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Tire and Loading Information Placard . . . . . 172,182
Tire Identification Number (TIN) . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Column Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Column Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INDEX 299
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54,175
Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183,264
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167,175
Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Wheel Nut Torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Tongue Weight/ Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Torque Converter Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Towing
Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Recreational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Trailering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Cooling System Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Minimum Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Trailer and Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Trailer Towing Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146,150,245
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144,146,245
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245,247,260
Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144,150,245
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
300 INDEX
Transmitter Battery Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Transmitter, Garage Door Opener . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Transmitter Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Trip Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70,99,255,256
Washers, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Weight Load Carrying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Wheel Alignment and Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Wheel and Wheel Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Wheel Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Wheel Nut Torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Rear Sliding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Vented Quarter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Windshield Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54,133,136
Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71,72,236
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71,236
Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Wipers, Intermittent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Wrecker Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Universal Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Unleaded Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Vehicle Identification Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172,191,194
Vehicle Modifications/ Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Vented Quarter Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster Description) . 99
Warnings and Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|